See in Reader
361 KiB
361 KiB
| 1 | Reference | ID | Tags | SupportReference | Quote | Occurrence | Note |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | front:intro | i6u9 | 0 | # Introduction to Galatians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Galatians\n\n1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).\n1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).\n1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).\n1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).\n1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?\n\nPaul wrote the book of Galatians. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus and establishing churches.\n\nIt is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some Bible scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus and establish churches. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.\n\n### What is the Book of Galatians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. In the book of Galatians Paul explains that people are saved as result of believing in Jesus and not as a result of obeying the law of Moses and he proves this by using various Old Testament passages to illustrate this truth. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?\n\nTo “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people who taught that it was necessary to follow the law of Moses in addition to believing in Jesus were called “Judaizers.”\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?\n\nThese terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” and “in Christ Jesus?” \n\nPaul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” or the related phrase “in Christ Jesus” very frequently in this letter. This expression occurs with a metaphorical meaning in 1:22; 2:4,17; 3:14, 26, 28; and 5:6. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the people who believe in him. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. Sometimes when Paul uses the phrase “in Christ” he intends a different meaning. See, for example, 2:16 where Paul says “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ” and see 2:17 where Paul spoke of Christ being the object of faith when he said “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ.” See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?\n* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) | |||
| 3 | 1:intro | f3n5 | 0 | # Galatians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Heresy\n\nGod eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])\n\n### Paul’s qualifications\n\nSome people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But Paul still needed God to save him through believing in Jesus. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”\n\nThe Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |||
| 4 | 1:1 | o4ns | Παῦλος | 1 | Here, Paul is introducing himself as the author of this letter. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul” | ||
| 5 | 1:1 | uhhp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person | Παῦλος | 1 | Paul is speaking of himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) | |
| 6 | 1:1 | m4ss | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐκ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων, οὐδὲ δι’ ἀνθρώπου | 1 | # General Information:\n\nIf your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate this phrase using only one negative word. Alternate translation: “not from men or through man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) | |
| 7 | 1:1 | rcnw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐκ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Here, the word **from** indicates source. The phrase **not from men** means that humans are not the source of Paul’s apostleship and that he was not commissioned or appointed an apostle by humans. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “not through the commissioning of humans” or “not through human commission” or “not sent out by people” or “not because I was appointed and sent by a group of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 8 | 1:1 | yqma | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπων & ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Although the terms **men** and **man** are masculine, Paul uses them here in a generic sense to refer to humans in general. Alternate translation: “humans … humans” or “people … a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 9 | 1:1 | k2dw | δι’ ἀνθρώπου, ἀλλὰ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς | 1 | Both times that the word **through** is used in this verse it indicates agency/means and refers to the agency/means by which Paul’s was commissioned as an apostle. Choose the best word in your language to indicate the meaning of the word **through** here. Alternate translation: “through the agency of man, but through the agency of Jesus Christ and God the Father” | ||
| 10 | 1:1 | pvdp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Here, the word **but** introduces a contrast between different potential agents or means of Paul’s commission. The word **but** is introducing a contrast between Paul’s apostleship being **not through man** but rather being **through Jesus Christ and God the Father**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 11 | 1:1 | fyu8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | Θεοῦ Πατρὸς τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | The phrase **the one having raised him from the dead** gives further information about **God the Father**. It is not making a distinction between **God the Father** and **the one having raised him from the dead** as if they are two separate entities. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “God the Father who is the same one who made Jesus Christ live again after he died” or “God the Father who caused Jesus Christ to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) | |
| 12 | 1:1 | wmlj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | Θεοῦ Πατρὸς | 1 | Here, the phrase **the Father** could be (1) a general title for God which identifies him as the first person in the Christian Trinity. If you choose this option then you should not define whose **Father** God is in your translation but rather you should use a more an expression like the ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) (2) referring to God’s relationship to those who believe in Christ. Alternate translation: “God our Father” | |
| 13 | 1:1 | w3gr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 14 | 1:1 | g5as | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | Here, the phrase **the dead** could be a figurative way of referring to a place, in which case it would be referring to “the place of the dead” or “the realm of the dead.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the place of the dead” or “from the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 15 | 1:2 | d737 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | Here, although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it in a generic sense to refer to fellow Christians, which includes both men and women. Paul views all those who believe in Jesus, as members of one spiritual family, with God as their heavenly Father. If your readers would misunderstand the use of **brothers** in this context, you can indicate explicitly what it means as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 16 | 1:2 | wmd2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Γαλατίας | 1 | Here, the word **Galatia** could refer to: (1) the Roman political province called **Galatia**. Alternate translation: “in the province of Galatia” or (2) the geographical region known as **Galatia**. Alternate translation: “in the region of Galatia” If it would help your readers you could state explicitly what the word **Galatia** refers to here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 17 | 1:2 | aa9v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς Γαλατίας | 1 | Paul uses the possessive form here to describe churches that are in Roman political province called **Galatia** or in the geographical region known as **Galatia**. If this use of the possessive form is not clear in your language, you could clarify the meaning using a form that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the province of Galatia” or “in the region of Galatia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 18 | 1:3 | nxtz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing | χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη | 1 | This is a common blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) | |
| 19 | 1:3 | psjz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 20 | 1:3 | nykr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you | ὑμῖν | 1 | Here, the word **you** is plural and refers to the Galatians. Unless noted otherwise, all instances of “you” and “your” in this letter refer to the Galatians and are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) | |
| 21 | 1:3 | c1xf | Θεοῦ Πατρὸς | 1 | See how you chose to translate the phrase **God the Father** in [1:1](../01/01.md). | ||
| 22 | 1:3 | eivd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the word **our** refers to Paul, the believers in Galatia, and all believers in Jesus and so is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. In this book, unless otherwise stated, the word “our” refers to Paul, the believers in Galatia, and all believers and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 23 | 1:4 | onj6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τοῦ δόντος ἑαυτὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν, ὅπως ἐξέληται ἡμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος πονηροῦ | 1 | The phrase **the one having given himself for our sins so that he might deliver us from the present evil age** gives us further information about “our Lord Jesus Christ.” It is not making a distinction between them as if they were two different entities. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one having given himself for our sins so that he might deliver us from the present evil age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) | |
| 24 | 1:4 | yk9g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, **sins** figuratively refers to the punishment for sin and the phrase **for our sins** refers to Christ giving his life “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved” or “to take the punishment we deserved because of our sins” or “to take the punishment for our sins” or “as a substitution for the punishment that our sins deserved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 25 | 1:4 | f2pm | ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν | 1 | See the note on **our** in [1:3](../01/03.md). | ||
| 26 | 1:4 | haib | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sins**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “sinful,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 27 | 1:4 | d8m2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ὅπως | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Christ gave himself for our sins. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 28 | 1:4 | f6d5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος πονηροῦ | 1 | Here, the phrase **the present evil age**, refers not only to a time period but also refers to the sinful attitudes and actions that characterize **the present evil age**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from this present time that is dominated by sinfulness” or “from this present evil age with it’s evil attitudes and desires” or “from the evil powers at work in the world today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 29 | 1:4 | mg01 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν | 1 | The phrase **and Father** gives further information about **our God**. It is not making a distinction between **God** and **Father** as if they are two separate entities. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these words more clear. Alternate translation: “of our God who is our Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) | |
| 30 | 1:5 | y7mj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ δόξα | 1 | The phrase **be the glory** is an expression of praise. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “praise”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 31 | 1:5 | miju | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate | ἀμήν | 1 | **Amen** is a Hebrew word. Paul spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. He assumes that they know that it means “so be it” or “yes indeed.” In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language. If your readers would not know what **Amen** means, you could also explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Amen, which means, ‘So be it!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) | |
| 32 | 1:6 | f74p | θαυμάζω | 1 | Alternate translation: “I am surprised” or “I am shocked” | ||
| 33 | 1:6 | v438 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὕτως ταχέως, μετατίθεσθε | 1 | Here, the phrase **turning away** means “to desert” and refers to turning ones heart or mind away from believing and following something. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are so quickly deserting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 34 | 1:6 | ficf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μετατίθεσθε | 1 | The phrase **you are turning away** is in the present tense and is portraying the action of **turning away** as in process, but not yet completed. Make sure that you express this phrase in your language in a way that shows that the Galatians **turning away** is currently happening but not complete. (Paul is writing this letter in order to encourage the Galatians to not turn away to **a different gospel**). | |
| 35 | 1:6 | cw1j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὕτως ταχέως | 1 | Here, the phrase **so quickly** means that the Galatians were turning away from faith in the true gospel shortly after they accepted it. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the true gospel so soon after accepting it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 36 | 1:6 | ht94 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀπὸ τοῦ καλέσαντος ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here, the phrase **the one** refers to “God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and from God, who is the one who has called you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 37 | 1:6 | qy93 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καλέσαντος | 1 | Here, the phrase **called** refers to being “chosen” by God. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 38 | 1:6 | ghhs | ἐν | 1 | Here, the word **in** could (1) refer to the Galatians being called “into” the sphere or realm of grace. Alternate translation: “into” or “to live in” (2) refer to the means by which the Galatians were saved. Alternate translation: “by” or “through” | ||
| 39 | 1:6 | cizk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | χάριτι | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “graciously”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 40 | 1:7 | l5ep | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἄλλο | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “another gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 41 | 1:7 | rg69 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions | εἰ μή τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ θέλοντες μεταστρέψαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If, in your language, the use of the word **except** makes it appear as if Paul is making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “instead certain people are causing you trouble and want to pervert the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) | |
| 42 | 1:7 | wnfe | τινές | 1 | Alternate translation: “certain people” | ||
| 43 | 1:7 | kswu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trouble**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “troubling,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “troubling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 44 | 1:7 | tec2 | μεταστρέψαι | 1 | Alternate translation: “to twist the truth of” or “to change” | ||
| 45 | 1:7 | k9d1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | By using the possessive form here, Paul is either using it to: (1) describe the gospel that is about Christ, in which case the possessive form is being used to describe the content of the gospel. Alternate translation: “the gospel about Christ” (2) designate Christ as the one who proclaimed the gospel message he is referring to in which case Paul is referring to the gospel message that Christ preached. Alternate translation: “the gospel that Christ proclaimed” or “the gospel that Christ preached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 46 | 1:8 | rltx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | καὶ ἐὰν ἡμεῖς ἢ ἄγγελος ἐξ οὐρανοῦ εὐαγγελίζηται ὑμῖν παρ’ ὃ εὐηγγελισάμεθα ὑμῖν, ἀνάθεμα ἔστω | 1 | The word **if** introduces a hypothetical situation. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to warn the Galatians against any teaching that is contrary to the original gospel message that they were taught. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if it were to happen that we or an angel from heaven might proclaim to you a gospel other than the one we proclaimed to you, let whoever would do that be cursed” or “suppose it were to happen that we or an angel from heaven might proclaim to you a gospel other than the one we proclaimed to you, let whoever would do that be cursed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 47 | 1:8 | wnx5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμεῖς | 1 | When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 48 | 1:8 | ebyi | ἡμεῖς | 1 | Alternate translation: “I or my co-laborers in the gospel” | ||
| 49 | 1:8 | f1ef | εὐαγγελίζηται ὑμῖν | 1 | Alternate translation: “proclaim to you a gospel message” or “a message of good news” | ||
| 50 | 1:8 | s5uq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | παρ’ ὃ εὐηγγελισάμεθα | 1 | Here, the phrase **the one** refers to the gospel message that Paul and his co-laborers had proclaimed to the Galatians. If your readers might misunderstand this you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “different from the gospel we proclaimed” or “different from the message we proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 51 | 1:8 | xb2c | ἀνάθεμα ἔστω | 1 | If your language has a common way of asking God to curse someone, or of calling down a curse on someone, and it would be appropriate to use in this context, consider using it here. | ||
| 52 | 1:8 | kv9h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀνάθεμα ἔστω | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of someone being **cursed**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “curse.” Alternate translation: “let God curse him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 53 | 1:8 | pifk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀνάθεμα ἔστω | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “let God curse him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 54 | 1:8 | g7zz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνάθεμα ἔστω | 1 | Although the term **him** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “let God curse that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 55 | 1:9 | anxe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | προειρήκαμεν | 1 | When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 56 | 1:9 | h1ht | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἴ τις ὑμᾶς εὐαγγελίζεται | 1 | The word **If** introduces a hypothetical situation. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to warn the Galatians against any teaching that is contrary to the original gospel message that they were taught. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “If it were to happen that someone proclaims to you a gospel” or “Suppose it were to happen that someone proclaims to you a gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 57 | 1:9 | i2wk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | παρ’ ὃ | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **other than the one** in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 58 | 1:9 | mrv9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀνάθεμα ἔστω | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **let him be cursed** in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 59 | 1:9 | eta3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνάθεμα ἔστω | 1 | Although the term **him** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how you translated the phrase **let him be cursed** in [1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “let God curse that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 60 | 1:10 | ifod | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** is being used to introduce Paul’s argument against an implied assertion that he altered the content of his gospel message in order to make it more acceptable to people. If it would help your readers, you could express the implied assertion explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 61 | 1:10 | b2vc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἄρτι γὰρ ἀνθρώπους πείθω ἢ τὸν Θεόν? ἢ ζητῶ ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκειν | 1 | By using these two rhetorical questions Paul is not asking the Galatians for information, but is using the question form for emphasis and to engage his readers thinking. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For I do not seek to persuade men, but instead I only seek the approval of God! I am not seeking to please men!” or “For I do not seek the approval of men, but instead I only seek the approval of God! I am not seeking to please men!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 62 | 1:10 | xhrn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἄρτι & ἀνθρώπους πείθω ἢ τὸν Θεόν? ἢ ζητῶ ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκειν? εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον | 1 | Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “people” in general. Alternate translation: “do I now persuade people, or God? Or do I seek to please people? If I were still pleasing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 63 | 1:10 | fl3c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον, Χριστοῦ δοῦλος οὐκ ἂν ἤμην | 1 | The word **if** introduces a hypothetical condition. Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatians. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation or if it would help your readers you can state Paul’s meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “I am not still trying to please men because I am a servant of Christ” or “If I were still pleasing people, then I would not be serving Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 64 | 1:11 | xve4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** is used to introduce a supporting statement that further supports and gives reason for Paul’s prior statement. Use a form that would be natural in your language for introducing a statement that supports a prior statement. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 65 | 1:11 | cnic | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 66 | 1:11 | o5cu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν ὑπ’ ἐμοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that I proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 67 | 1:11 | hew1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον | 1 | Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “humans.” Alternate translation: “did not come from a human” or “is not a human message” or “is not a message that people made up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 68 | 1:12 | zfxj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** could be being used to introduce: (1) the grounds or basis for Paul’s assertion in [1:11](../01/11.md), in which case what follows the word **For** is support for what Paul said in [1:11](../01/11.md). Use a form that would be natural for introducing a statement which gives supporting evidence. Alternate translation: “In support of my claim that the gospel I proclaimed is not according to man, I want you to know that” (2) a statement which explains and builds on Paul’s assertion in [1:11](../01/11.md). Use a form that would be natural for introducing a statement which further clarifies and explains a prior statement. Alternate translation: “To explain further, I want you to know” or “That is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 69 | 1:12 | kdol | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | οὐδὲ & ἐγὼ παρὰ ἀνθρώπου παρέλαβον αὐτό, οὔτε ἐδιδάχθην | 1 | The phrase **I did not receive it from man** and the phrase **nor was I taught it** mean basically the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I did not receive the gospel that I proclaim from any person” or “no human being taught me the gospel that I proclaim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) | |
| 70 | 1:12 | er9c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women, and refers to “humans.” See how you translated the word **man** in [1:11](../01/11.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “people” or “humans” or “a human source” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 71 | 1:12 | y2am | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐδιδάχθην | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 72 | 1:12 | hlg6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | αὐτό & ἐδιδάχθην | 1 | Here, both occurrences of the word **it** refer back to “the gospel” which Paul “proclaimed” which he mentioned in [1:11](../01/11.md). If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel that I proclaimed … was I taught the gospel that I proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 73 | 1:12 | qohz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐδιδάχθην | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was I taught it by any person” or “was I taught it by man” or “was I taught it by a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 74 | 1:12 | g1o6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | What follows the word **but** is in contrast to the phrases **receive it from man** and **taught it**. In contrast to Paul receiving the message he proclaimed from a human source or being **taught it** Paul received it from a divine source. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “rather” or “instead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 75 | 1:12 | leqs | δι’ | 1 | Alternate translation: “through a” | ||
| 76 | 1:12 | uybt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀποκαλύψεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 77 | 1:12 | wed1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Paul could be using the possessive form here to mean: (1) that God revealed Jesus Christ to Paul. This would mean that God is the one who did the revealing and Jesus Christ is the one who God revealed. See the phrase “to reveal his Son in me” in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “God revealed Jesus Christ to me” or “God made me know the gospel when he showed Jesus Christ to me” (2) that it was Jesus Christ who made the revelation to Paul. Alternate translation: “by what Jesus Christ revealed to me” (3) both option 1 and 2 together. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel about himself” or “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel concerning himself”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 78 | 1:12 | nee4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I received it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” or “but I was taught it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 79 | 1:13 | f3gl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἐμὴν ἀναστροφήν ποτε | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **manner** and **life**, you could express the same idea with a verbal phrase such as “how I formerly lived”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “how I formerly lived” or “how I formerly conducted myself” or “how I formerly behaved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 80 | 1:13 | r8ol | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ Ἰουδαϊσμῷ | 1 | Here, the phrase **in Judaism** refers to following the Jewish religious guidelines. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “following the Jewish religion” or “following the Jewish religious guidelines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 81 | 1:13 | ydx9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν | 1 | The phrase **beyond measure** is an idiom meaning “excessively.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “excessively” or “to an extreme degree” or “intensely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 82 | 1:14 | vtug | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ Ἰουδαϊσμῷ | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **in Judaism** in [1:13](../01/13.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “in the Jewish religion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 83 | 1:14 | aecd | τῷ γένει | 1 | Alternate translation: “nation” | ||
| 84 | 1:14 | gdwi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | τῷ γένει μου | 1 | The word **race** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “my ethnic group the Jews” or “my people the Jews” or “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 85 | 1:14 | bcdo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῶν πατρικῶν μου | 1 | Here, the word **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” If your readers would not understand what **fathers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “of my ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 86 | 1:15 | w6zi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what was expected. What would be expected is that Paul would continue thinking and acting according to the way he formerly did as described in [1:14](../01/14.md). Instead, God **called** Paul, and as the next verse says, God revealed Jesus to him, so that he might teach the Gentiles about Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 87 | 1:15 | ofqm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ | 1 | Here, the phrase **the one** refers to God. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 88 | 1:15 | qu8s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ὅτε & εὐδόκησεν ὁ, ἀφορίσας με ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός μου, καὶ καλέσας διὰ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ | 1 | The statement **having set me apart from the womb of my mother and having called {me} through his grace** gives us further information about the **the one** (God). It is not making a distinction. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “when God, who is the one who set me apart from my mother’s womb and called me through his grace, was pleased” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) | |
| 89 | 1:15 | iyc1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός μου | 1 | The phrase **from the womb of my mother** is a Hebrew idiom which means either “from the day of my birth” or “from before birth.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from the day I was born” or “from before I was born.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 90 | 1:15 | wd26 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καλέσας | 1 | Here, the word **called** means “to choose and summon.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having chosen and summoned me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 91 | 1:15 | wlph | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς χάριτος | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 92 | 1:16 | l97h | ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ | 1 | The phrase **reveal his Son in me** could mean: (1) that God revealed his Son “to” Paul and refer to God revealing to Paul who Jesus really was so that Paul had an inward knowledge of who Jesus really was. Alternate translation: “to reveal to me his Son” (2) that God revealed his Son to others “through” Paul. Alternate translation: “to reveal his Son to others through me” or “to reveal his Son to others by me” | ||
| 93 | 1:16 | z800 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. After the phrase **so that** Paul states the purpose for which God revealed his Son to Paul, namely so that he **might preach him among the Gentiles**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 94 | 1:16 | xx4c | εὐαγγελίζωμαι αὐτὸν | 1 | Alternate translation: “I might proclaim the good news about God’s Son” | ||
| 95 | 1:16 | qme5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | σαρκὶ καὶ αἵματι | 1 | Paul refers figuratively to “human beings” by naming a few of the things that a human being is made of, specifically **flesh and blood**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “any human being” or “any person” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 96 | 1:17 | qh88 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go | ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα | 1 | **Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “come” rather than **go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did I come up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 97 | 1:17 | w82a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | What follows the word **Instead** is in contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 98 | 1:17 | zqih | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go | ἀπῆλθον εἰς | 1 | Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 99 | 1:18 | c7gb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential | ἔπειτα | 1 | The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) | |
| 100 | 1:18 | rej5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go | ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα | 1 | **Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 101 | 1:19 | av43 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions | ἕτερον & τῶν ἀποστόλων οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ Ἰάκωβον | 1 | If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only other apostles I saw were James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) | |
| 102 | 1:20 | d9yv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ἰδοὺ | 1 | **behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “pay attention to this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) | |
| 103 | 1:20 | h3cb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes | οὐ ψεύδομαι | 1 | Here, Paul uses a phrase that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) | |
| 104 | 1:20 | pp11 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the phrase **before God** is an oath. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an oath from your language that would be appropriate in this context or you could make it clear in your translation that Paul is making an oath. Alternate translation: “I solemnly testify before God” or “in God’s presence I testify” or “I swear with God as my witness” or “I swear before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 105 | 1:21 | ny6z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential | ἔπειτα ἦλθον εἰς | 1 | The word **then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events Paul has just described in [1:18-19](../01/18.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase or by expressing the meaning in some other way that is natural to your readers. Alternate translation: “After I left Jerusalem I went to” or “After that I went to” or “Afterwards I went to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) | |
| 106 | 1:22 | y6l4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἤμην & ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “none of the people in the churches of Judea that are in Christ had ever met me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 107 | 1:22 | wleq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | ἤμην & ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | Paul uses the main feature of his appearance, his **face**, to refer figuratively to seeing his entire person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 108 | 1:22 | sr0y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union believers have with Christ and here it is specifically describing/modifying **the churches of Judea**. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe what the phrase “in Christ” means here. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 109 | 1:23 | bdmz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast between what the Judean believers did know about Paul (they were **hearing** that he was **now proclaiming the faith**) with what they did not know about Paul (how he looked, [1:22](../01/22.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 110 | 1:23 | hw08 | μόνον & ἀκούοντες ἦσαν | 1 | Alternate translation: “all that the believers in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying” or “all that the people belonging to the churches in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying” | ||
| 111 | 1:23 | ss1e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ | 1 | Here, the phrase **The one** refers to Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 112 | 1:23 | bh1m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν πίστιν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 113 | 1:23 | lo0r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὴν πίστιν | 1 | Paul is figuratively describing the message about Jesus (the gospel) by association with **faith**, which is the response that the message about Jesus requires or solicits. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” or “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 114 | 1:23 | y5ud | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐπόρθει | 1 | Here, the word **destroying** refers to trying to stop the spread of the Christian message. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 115 | 1:24 | qp4t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐν ἐμοὶ | 1 | Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 116 | 1:24 | cpni | ἐν ἐμοὶ | 1 | The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” | ||
| 117 | 2:intro | xe28 | 0 | # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) | |||
| 118 | 2:1 | mtgj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential | ἔπειτα | 1 | The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) | |
| 119 | 2:1 | zt61 | ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα | 1 | # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). | ||
| 120 | 2:1 | zth5 | ἀνέβην | 1 | Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | ||
| 121 | 2:2 | e8xu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) | |
| 122 | 2:2 | ll4j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go | ἀνέβην | 1 | See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 123 | 2:2 | szwl | κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν | 1 | The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate that Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me” | ||
| 124 | 2:2 | zvkg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 125 | 2:2 | g384 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς | 1 | Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 126 | 2:2 | ypg1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 127 | 2:2 | msv4 | τοῖς δοκοῦσιν | 1 | Alternate translation: “to the men who seemed to be influential” or “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem” | ||
| 128 | 2:2 | t6we | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) | |
| 129 | 2:2 | ejb8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 130 | 2:2 | svvy | εἰς κενὸν | 1 | Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” | ||
| 131 | 2:3 | wyrr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] | |
| 132 | 2:3 | ybww | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν | 1 | The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) | |
| 133 | 2:3 | xs8k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι | 1 | The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 134 | 2:4 | kwoz | διὰ δὲ & ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν | 1 | The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised. Alternate translation: “But this issue occurred because of” (2) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But I talked to them privately because” or “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. Alternate translation (notice that only the punctuation differs from the ULT, the closing “—” indicates that Paul does not complete his thought before moving onto the next verse): “But it was because of … so that they will enslave us—” | ||
| 135 | 2:4 | j5ka | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι | 1 | Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 136 | 2:4 | jx0q | παρεισάκτους | 1 | In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of” | ||
| 137 | 2:4 | fpkc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ψευδαδέλφους | 1 | Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 138 | 2:4 | etlo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 139 | 2:4 | lyqj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἔχομεν | 1 | When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 140 | 2:4 | uvjw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” or “through our union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 141 | 2:4 | v9fp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which the **false brothers** spied on their freedom, to **enslave them**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 142 | 2:4 | l7n7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν | 1 | Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 143 | 2:5 | pow3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | εἴξαμεν | 1 | When Paul says **we**, he is not including the Galatian Christians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 144 | 2:5 | w6dm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οἷς οὐδὲ & εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ | 1 | Here, to **not … yield in submission** means “to not agree with and comply with the demands of” the people who said that Titus needed to be circumcised. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “we did not give in to their demands” or “we did not comply with what they wanted us to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 145 | 2:5 | bba7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **submission**, you could express the same idea with a verbal phrase as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 146 | 2:5 | smpn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὥραν | 1 | Here, the phrase **an hour** refers to a short period of time. If you have an equivalent expression in your culture you could use that or if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate Paul’s meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “a short period of time” or “a short amount of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 147 | 2:5 | a3hr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Paul and his ministry partners **did not … yield in submission** to those who taught that circumcision was necessary. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 148 | 2:5 | k61r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “true” and/or “correct,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 149 | 2:5 | bqqq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου | 1 | Here, the possessive form is used to describe the **truth** that belongs to and is contained within **the gospel** message. It is also being used to contrast the genuine and correct gospel with “false gospels” such as the one Paul is refuting in this letter. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 150 | 2:6 | xcdh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce something that is in contrast to what the “false brothers” in [2:4](../02/04.md) wanted to do. The “false brothers” wanted to “enslave” the believers by adding the requirement of circumcision to the gospel message. Beginning in this verse Paul explains (in [2:6-10](../6/06.md)) that, in contrast to the actions of the “false brothers,” the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not require that Paul add anything to the content of his gospel message. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] | |
| 151 | 2:6 | rfvs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῶν δοκούντων εἶναί τι | 1 | The phrase **the ones seeming to be something•• implies the word “important” and is very similar in meaning to the phrase ••the ones seeming important** at the end of this verse. If it would help your readers, you could express the implied word explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ones seeming to be something important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 152 | 2:6 | flz3 | ὁποῖοί ποτε ἦσαν, οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει, πρόσωπον ὁ Θεὸς ἀνθρώπου οὐ λαμβάνει | 1 | The phrase **what sort they were formerly matters nothing to me; God does not accept the face of man** is a parenthetical statement. Use a natural form in your language for introducing and/or expressing a parenthetical statement. | ||
| 153 | 2:6 | zrw5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁποῖοί | 1 | The phrase **what sort** implies the word “people.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “what sort of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 154 | 2:6 | st6l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁποῖοί ποτε ἦσαν, οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει | 1 | The phrase **what sort they were formerly matters nothing to me** does not mean that Paul did not regard these people’s character as important but rather it means that he did not let their status influence his decision making. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 155 | 2:6 | c9xx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | πρόσωπον ὁ Θεὸς ἀνθρώπου οὐ λαμβάνει | 1 | Here, the term **face** means “external status and position.” The phrase **God does not accept the face of man** is an idiom which means that God does not base his judgements and decisions on external factors. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “God does not judge with partiality” or “God does not look at external factors when making decisions” or “God does not show partiality” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 156 | 2:6 | nm0b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a general sense to mean all people in general, including women. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations) | |
| 157 | 2:6 | ku3t | οἱ δοκοῦντες | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase “those who seemed to be important” in [2:2](../02/02.md). | ||
| 158 | 2:6 | afy6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐμοὶ & οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο | 1 | Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 159 | 2:7 | visz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ τοὐναντίον | 1 | Paul uses the phrase **But on the contrary** to introduce a contrast to the idea that the leaders in Jerusalem might have added anything to the content of his message. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 160 | 2:7 | l5m5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἰδόντες | 1 | Here, the phrase **having seen** means “having understood**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 161 | 2:7 | vlpz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πεπίστευμαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God entrusted me with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 162 | 2:7 | m5e5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἀκροβυστίας, καθὼς Πέτρος τῆς περιτομῆς | 1 | Paul is describing non-Jewish people by association with something they would not have had done to them, circumcision, and he is describing Jewish people by association with something they would have had done to them, circumcision. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 163 | 2:8 | tmva | ὁ γὰρ ἐνεργήσας Πέτρῳ εἰς ἀποστολὴν τῆς περιτομῆς, ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη | 1 | This entire verse is a parenthetical statement. In this verse Paul gives the reason why the leaders of the church in Jerusalem determined that Paul was authorized and commissioned by God to bring the gospel to non-Jews. Use a natural form in your language for introducing and/or expressing a parenthetical statement. | ||
| 164 | 2:8 | yh9s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ | 1 | Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 165 | 2:8 | e5wv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῆς περιτομῆς | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 166 | 2:8 | n1b6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐνήργησεν καὶ ἐμοὶ εἰς τὰ ἔθνη | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “also worked in me for apostleship to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 167 | 2:9 | qfp1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | γνόντες τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι | 1 | The abstract noun *grace** refers to God graciously giving Paul the task of proclaiming the gospel to non-Jews. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “graciously” or “kindly” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having understood the task that God had graciously given to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 168 | 2:9 | dt40 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὴν δοθεῖσάν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 169 | 2:9 | k66v | οἱ δοκοῦντες & εἶναι | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **the ones seeming to be** in [2:2](../02/02.md). | ||
| 170 | 2:9 | he6q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἱ δοκοῦντες στῦλοι εἶναι | 1 | Here, **pillars** refers to James, Cephas and John, who were leaders of the believers in Jerusalem. In that culture important leaders of a group were sometimes referred to as **pillars** because of the support that they provided the group. If your readers would not understand what **pillars** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 171 | 2:9 | e5rm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction | δεξιὰς ἔδωκαν & κοινωνίας | 1 | Here, **gave the right hand** is an action that indicates agreement. Shaking hands indicated that they agreed with each other and were pledging to work together as ministry partners towards the same goal. Essentially, they would be in fellowship and shaking each others right hand indicated this. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) | |
| 172 | 2:9 | yxvz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κοινωνίας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fellowship**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 173 | 2:9 | bl9v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **James and Cephas and John … gave the right hand of fellowship to Barnabas** and Paul. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 174 | 2:9 | uuss | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The words he is leaving out are probably “go” or “proclaim the good news.” If it would help your readers, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we would go to the Gentiles, and they would go the circumcision” or “we would proclaim the good news to the Gentiles, and they would proclaim the good news to the circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 175 | 2:9 | j031 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμεῖς | 1 | When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 176 | 2:9 | n8en | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὴν περιτομήν | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 177 | 2:10 | fpj8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions | μόνον τῶν πτωχῶν ἵνα μνημονεύωμεν | 1 | Here, the word **only** introduces an exception clause that qualifies Paul’s statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md), where Paul said that the leaders in Jerusalem “added nothing” to his message (meaning they did not require him to do or teach anything else). Use an appropriate form in your language so that it does not appear that Paul is making a statement here that contradicts his statement at the end of [2:6](../02/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) | |
| 178 | 2:10 | v265 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | μνημονεύωμεν | 1 | When Paul says **we** here, he is not including the Galatians, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 179 | 2:10 | bbdk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῶν πτωχῶν & μνημονεύωμεν | 1 | Here, **remember the poor** refers to remembering the needs of the poor. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we should continue to remember to take care of the needs of the poor” or “we should continue to remember to help the poor with their needs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 180 | 2:10 | yfu3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | πτωχῶν | 1 | Paul is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 181 | 2:11 | rdi8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast. The actions that Paul will describe in [2:11-13](../02/11.md) are in contrast to the decision that was made in [2:1-10](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 182 | 2:11 | yuav | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go | ἦλθεν | 1 | Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 183 | 2:11 | c9h4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην | 1 | The phrase **to his face** is an idiom which means to confront someone and could refer specifically to: (1) confronting someone directly, face to face. If your readers would not understand what this idiom means, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I confronted him directly” or “I confronted him face to face” (2) confronting someone in public. (See the phrase “I said to Cephas in front of all of them” in [2:14](../02/14.md)). Alternate translation: “I confronted him in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 184 | 2:11 | cr74 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατεγνωσμένος ἦν | 1 | Here, the phrase **he stood condemned** means that “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he was deserving of blame” or “he was wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 185 | 2:11 | qvig | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge | ὅτε δὲ ἦλθεν Κηφᾶς εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην, ὅτι κατεγνωσμένος ἦν | 1 | This verse gives the result of Cephas’ hypocritical actions, and [2:12-13](../02/12.md) gives the reason for (and explanation leading to) the result. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by placing verse 12 and 13 before the contents of this verse as modeled by the UST. You would need to adapt or not translate the first phrase in [2:14](../02/14.md), “But when” so that [2:14](../02/14.md) begins with (or with something similar to) the phrase “I saw” as modeled by the UST. You would then present the combined verses as 11-13. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) | |
| 186 | 2:12 | yeeb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s reason for why he “opposed” Cephas “to his face” (see [2:11](../02/11.md)) and for why Paul claimed in [2:11](../02/11.md) that Cephas “stood condemned.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. If it would be more natural in your language to state the reason for an action before giving the result see the note for [2:11](../02/11.md) on creating a verse bridge. Alternate translation: “The reason is that” or “The reason that Peter stood condemned is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 187 | 2:12 | hqcc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go | ἐλθεῖν & ἦλθον | 1 | Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went … they went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 188 | 2:12 | b23d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Paul uses the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between how Peter acted **before certain ones came from James** and how he acted after **they came**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 189 | 2:12 | a6gv | ἀφώριζεν ἑαυτόν | 1 | Alternate translation: “stayed away from” | ||
| 190 | 2:12 | z1kg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | φοβούμενος τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς | 1 | If it would help your readers, the reason Peter was **afraid** can be stated explicitly as modeled by the UST. See [6:12](../06/12.md) where Paul says that those trying to compel the Galatian believers were doing so because the did not want to be persecuted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 191 | 2:12 | fy79 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τοὺς ἐκ περιτομῆς | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **the circumcision** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Here, the term **the circumcision** probably refers specifically to Jews who were not believers in Jesus, since it is unlikely that Peter would have feared Jewish Christians or the men whom James sent. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 192 | 2:13 | urwh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οἱ λοιποὶ Ἰουδαῖοι | 1 | Here, the phrase **the rest of the Jews** refers only to the other Jewish believers who were in Antioch. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 193 | 2:13 | nkrh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the result of the hypocritical actions of “Cephas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)) and **the rest of the Jews** who **joined with him**. The result was that **Barnabas was led astray by their hypocrisy**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 194 | 2:13 | iau6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει | 1 | Here, the phrase **led astray** means to influence or convince someone to think and/or act in a specific way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also acted hypocritically” or “was influenced by their hypocritical behavior so that he also joined them in acting hypocritically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 195 | 2:13 | v4cj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καὶ Βαρναβᾶς συναπήχθη αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they even led Barnabas astray by their hypocrisy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 196 | 2:13 | vmkj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | αὐτῶν τῇ ὑποκρίσει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “hypocritical,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by their hypocritical behavior” or “by their hypocritical actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 197 | 2:14 | k16c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between his actions and the wrong actions of Cephas, Barnabas, and the other Jewish believers that he described in [2:12-13](../02/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 198 | 2:14 | sg53 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | οὐκ ὀρθοποδοῦσιν | 1 | Here, the word **walking** is a Jewish figure of speech which refers to how a person acts or conducts their life. In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “they were not acting correctly” or “they were not conducting their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 199 | 2:14 | va3a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the phrase **the truth of the gospel** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 200 | 2:14 | s978 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations | εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν | 1 | This is the beginning of a direct quotation in which Paul quotes what he **said to Cephas**. Some Bible scholars think this quote ends at the end of this verse while other Bible scholars think that this quotation goes until the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Some Bible scholars think that part of Paul’s words in [2:15-21](../02/15.md) could be him summarizing what he said to Peter and the Jews who were present. The ULT uses quotation marks from this point through the end of [2:21](../02/21.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of [2:21](../02/21.md) are a quotation. If you decide that Paul is only quoting himself through the end of this verse then use a natural way in your language for indicating that Paul’s words from here to the end of this verse are a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) | |
| 201 | 2:14 | z4fp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς, πῶς τὰ ἔθνη ἀναγκάζεις Ἰουδαΐζειν | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphatically rebuke Cephas and to help Cephas understand the hypocrisy of his actions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very hypocritical for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” or “You are a Jew, and live like a Gentile, and not like a Jew, and so it is very wrong for you to force the Gentiles to live like Jews!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 202 | 2:14 | qlzt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος, ὑπάρχων ἐθνικῶς καὶ οὐκ Ἰουδαϊκῶς ζῇς | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you, being a Jew, live like a Gentile, and not a like Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 203 | 2:14 | ish9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | σὺ & ἀναγκάζεις | 1 | Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse refer to Peter and are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 204 | 2:15 | vjsh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμεῖς | 1 | When Paul says **We** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 205 | 2:15 | tzxo | ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί | 1 | Alternate translation: “We had Jewish parents and are not Gentiles” | ||
| 206 | 2:15 | tz45 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί | 1 | The word **sinners** was used by Jews as a synonym for non-Jews because non-Jews did not have or adhere to the Law of Moses. Paul is not saying that only non-Jewish people are **sinners**. The rest of this letter will make clear that both Jews and non-Jews are sinners and need God’s forgiveness. If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly that the term **sinners** is what Jews called non-Jews, as modeled by the UST. Alternatively you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “non-Jews who do not have or follow the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 207 | 2:16 | vduo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what would be naturally be expected by a Jewish person in view of [2:15](../02/15.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 208 | 2:16 | y3tl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἄνθρωπος | 1 | Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” or “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 209 | 2:16 | xhx3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιοῦται & δικαιωθῶμεν & δικαιωθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 210 | 2:16 | s2ys | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἔργων νόμου | -1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe what types of **works** he is referring to. He is specifically referring to works of the Mosaic law. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses … doing the works that are commanded in the law of Moses” or “doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded … doing the things Moses commanded” or “doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses … doing the things commanded in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 211 | 2:16 | purc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἔργων νόμου | -1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “obeys” or “obey”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 212 | 2:16 | ncnt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions | ἐὰν μὴ | 1 | If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but rather only” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) | |
| 213 | 2:16 | iivr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως | -1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a such as “believing” or “trusts”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 214 | 2:16 | q4iw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμεῖς & δικαιωθῶμεν | 1 | When Paul says **we** it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and the Jewish Christians in Antioch, so **we** is inclusive both times that it occurs in this verse. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 215 | 2:16 | nzcb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which he and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**, which is **so that** they **might be justified by faith in Christ**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 216 | 2:16 | gp4w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὅτι ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σάρξ | 1 | Here, the word **For** re-introduces and re-states the reason why Cephas and the other Jewish believers **believed in Christ Jesus**. They **believed in Jesus Christ** for the reason that **by works of the law no flesh will be justified**. The phrase **by works of the law no flesh will be justified** is saying the exact same thing, in slightly different words, as the phrase which occurs earlier in the verse which says **no man is justified by works of the law**. If it would not be natural in your language to re-introduce the reason after the result you could re-introduce and re-state the result. Alternate translation: “We believed in Christ Jesus because no flesh will be justified by works of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 217 | 2:16 | j7g5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | σάρξ | 1 | The word **flesh** refers to human beings. Paul uses a part of humans to refer to the entire human. The phrase “any flesh” means “any person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 218 | 2:16 | ctbj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | οὐ & ἄνθρωπος & πᾶσα σάρξ | 1 | Both the words “man” and “flesh” refer to people in general and include all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people and refer to people of all ages and nationalities. The phrases “no man” and “any flesh” exclude all people, both Jewish people and Gentile people. Paul is saying the same thing, two different ways to emphasize that no person, Jew or Gentile, is justified by obeying the law. Since Paul explains this truth in this passage, you do not need to explain its meaning further here, but make sure to use words or phrases when translating the words “man” and “flesh” which indicate that these words refer to (include) all people of all ages and nationalities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 219 | 2:17 | gf9q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word “But” to introduce new information into his ongoing explanation for why justification is through faith in Christ and not obeying the Law of Moses. Here, Paul is anticipating, and answering, a possible objection to justification by faith. The word **But** introduces this. Use a natural form in your language for doing this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 220 | 2:17 | gtu7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 221 | 2:17 | vnp6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζητοῦντες δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | The phrase **justified in Christ** means made righteous in God’s sight because of being united with Christ by believing in what he has done. This phrase means the same thing as the phrase “justified by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the “justified by faith in Christ” there and, if it would help your readers, consider stating more fully here what the phrase **to be justified in Christ** means. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 222 | 2:17 | m0tl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιωθῆναι ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for God to justify us through our faith in Christ” or “for God to justify us because of our faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 223 | 2:17 | s2r8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | εὑρέθημεν | 1 | When Paul says **we** here it is inclusive because Paul is addressing Peter and including Peter and Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 224 | 2:17 | mg0h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | αὐτοὶ | 1 | Paul uses the word **ourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) | |
| 225 | 2:17 | ph83 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | εὑρέθημεν καὶ αὐτοὶ ἁμαρτωλοί | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 226 | 2:17 | c1op | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτωλοί & ἁμαρτίας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin** or being a sinner, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 227 | 2:17 | qw76 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἆρα Χριστὸς ἁμαρτίας διάκονος | 1 | The phrase **is Christ then a minister of sin** is a rhetorical question. Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 228 | 2:17 | yy9s | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | The expression **May it never be** gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question **is Christ a minister of sin?**. Use a natural way in your language for strongly and emphatically negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Of course, that is not true!” or “No, never!” or “No way!” | ||
| 229 | 2:18 | mwuo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἃ κατέλυσα, ταῦτα πάλιν οἰκοδομῶ, παραβάτην ἐμαυτὸν συνιστάνω | 1 | Paul speaks of no longer thinking it is necessary to obey all the laws of Moses as if he were destroying the law of Moses. When he speaks of rebuilding **those things** he is referring to going back again to acting like, and teaching, that it is necessary to keep the laws of Moses. Paul is saying in this verse that he would be sinning if he **again** tried to go back to living as if it was necessary to obey the laws of Moses after becoming convinced that it was not necessary. If your readers would not understand what it means to **rebuild** or destroy in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 230 | 2:18 | o7g8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | παραβάτην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **a transgressor**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 231 | 2:19 | wdaa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** is introducing the reason that Paul said **May it never be” in [2:17](../02/17.md) and and also introducing information which gives support for what he said in [2:18](../02/18.md). Use a natural form for introducing a reason for something that was said prior. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 232 | 2:19 | zqqw | διὰ νόμου | 1 | Alternate translation: “by means of the law” | ||
| 233 | 2:19 | r55d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐγὼ & νόμῳ ἀπέθανον | 1 | Here, the phrase, **I … died to the law** could: (1) be a metaphor that refers to believers’ vicarious death with Christ through their believing in him and their consequent union with him which they as a result of their faith in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. (See [Rom 7:4](../07/04.md) and [Gal 4:4-5](../04/04.md)) Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through my union with Christ” (2) be a metaphor that refers to Paul’s experience in trying to obey the law. Alternate translation: “I … died to the law through the things that it required” or “I … died to the law through the things that it commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 234 | 2:19 | yl7y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose or reason for which he **died to the law**. The purpose was **so that** he **might live to God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 235 | 2:19 | l3r9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Θεῷ ζήσω | 1 | The phrase **live to God** means “live for God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I might live for God” or “I might live to serve God” or “I might live to please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 236 | 2:19 | xg5q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι | 1 | The phrase **I have been crucified with Christ** is a metaphor. Paul is not saying that he literally died with Christ. Paul is using this metaphor to express the reality that as a result of his faith in Christ, and the subsequent union with Christ that his faith has brought about, God now views Paul as if he had died with Christ. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **crucified with Christ** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 237 | 2:19 | fh2i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | Χριστῷ συνεσταύρωμαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “the law” was the reason Christ had to be but to death. Roman soldiers put Jesus to death, but in context Paul is explaining that it was because of the requirements of “the law” that put Christ to died. If you must state the action you could explain this in your translation as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 238 | 2:20 | o3jk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ζῶ & οὐκέτι ἐγώ, ζῇ δὲ ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός | 1 | Here, the phrase **I no longer live, but Christ lives in me** is a metaphor. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or you could express the meaning plainly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 239 | 2:20 | y2qf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὃ & νῦν ζῶ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 240 | 2:20 | rtmc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | ὃ & νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. The phrase **that which I now live in the flesh** means “that life which I now live in the body” and refers to Paul’s present life on earth in his physical body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that life which I now live in the body” or “that life which I now live in my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 241 | 2:20 | a4j0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν πίστει ζῶ τῇ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | When Paul says **I live by faith that is in the Son of God** he means that he now lives his life by means of having faith in God’s Son. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “I live by having faith in God’s Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 242 | 2:20 | bb2x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | **the Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) | |
| 243 | 2:20 | m55w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντός με | 1 | The phrase **the one** refers to **the Son of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is the one having loved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 244 | 2:20 | by5a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | παραδόντος ἑαυτὸν | 1 | The phrase **having given himself** means that Jesus gave himself as a sacrifice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 245 | 2:21 | tj6l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes | οὐκ ἀθετῶ | 1 | Here, Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative phrase, **do not**, together with a phrase, **set aside** that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I strongly affirm” or “I do uphold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) | |
| 246 | 2:21 | xvoq | οὐκ ἀθετῶ | 1 | Alternate translation: “I do not ignore” or “I do not dismiss” | ||
| 247 | 2:21 | g5b8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “kindly”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the similar expression “the grace of Christ” in [1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 248 | 2:21 | ogus | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνη | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “righteous”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 249 | 2:21 | yl3c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo | εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is not true. Paul stated two times in [2:16](../02/16.md) that no person is made righteous before God by obeying the Law of Moses. Also, Paul knows that Christ died for a definite purpose. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certainly false, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as a negative statement. If your language does state things as a hypothetical possibility that the speaker is trying to prove false then use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “since we know that righteousness is through faith in Christ and not through the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” or “because we know that God considers us righteousness because we believe in Christ and not because we keep the law, or else Christ would have died for nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) | |
| 250 | 2:21 | imxg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ γὰρ διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Use a natural way in your language for expressing conditional “if … then” constructions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 251 | 2:21 | m74u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰ & διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη | 1 | Here, the word **through** expresses the means by which something happens. The phrase **if righteousness is through the law** means “if righteousness could be obtained through keeping the law.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if righteousness could be obtained by keeping the law” or “if a person could be justified by keeping the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 252 | 2:21 | dv5f | διὰ νόμου | 1 | The phrase **through the law** is equivalent in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md). See how you translated the phrase “by works of the law” the two times that it occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md). | ||
| 253 | 2:21 | rku5 | ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν | 1 | Alternate translation: “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” or “then it was pointless for Christ to die” | ||
| 254 | 3:intro | xd92 | 0 | # Galatians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Equality in Christ\n\nAll Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nPaul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\nThis is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter in contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])\n\n### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”\nBible scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit all of the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |||
| 255 | 3:1 | u6lo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ὦ | 1 | **O** is an exclamation word. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language that would be natural to use in this context. Alternate translation: “Oh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) | |
| 256 | 3:1 | xvji | ἀνόητοι Γαλάται | 1 | Alternate translation: “you Galatians are without understanding” or “you Galatians who are without understanding” | ||
| 257 | 3:1 | p7uw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν | 1 | # General Information:\n\nPaul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 258 | 3:1 | ryu7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony | τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν | 1 | Paul is using irony to express the fact that the Galatian believers are acting as though someone has put a spell on them. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on them. In fact Paul is upset with the Galatians believers for willingly choosing to believe false teachers and letting themselves be deceived. If your readers would misunderstand what Paul is saying here, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You behave as if someone has put a spell on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) | |
| 259 | 3:1 | gwv2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἷς κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος | 1 | This phrase is a metaphor which could: (1) be referring to someone publicly drawing a picture for people to see. In this case Paul would be referring to the teaching about Jesus that the Galatians had received as if it were a clear picture that they had seen with their eyes. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (2) be referring to the practice of someone posting a public announcement for people to read. In this case Paul would be referring to his preaching the good news about Jesus as if it were a public announcement which the Galatians had read. If your readers would not understand what **publicly portrayed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you yourselves heard the clear teaching about Jesus being crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 260 | 3:1 | ty3a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 261 | 3:2 | wq9g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἐξ ἔργων νόμου τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐλάβετε, ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You received the Spirit, not by doing what the law says, but by believing what you heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 262 | 3:2 | wll8 | Πνεῦμα | 1 | The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you use a word that would be appropriate to use for the Holy Spirit. | ||
| 263 | 3:2 | dbp8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐξ ἔργων νόμου | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 264 | 3:2 | cfj2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form here to describe the response that the Galatians had when they heard the preaching of the gospel which was to respond to it with **faith**. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “by believing what you heard” or “by hearing with faith” or “by trusting in the Messiah when you heard the message about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 265 | 3:3 | f96u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | οὕτως ἀνόητοί ἐστε | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to emphatically show his surprise. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “You are very foolish!” or “Don’t be so foolish!” or “Surely you cannot be so foolish!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 266 | 3:3 | kkg7 | οὕτως | 1 | Here, the word **so** adds magnitude to (amplifies) the word **foolish** and also points forward to what comes after the word **foolish**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this. | ||
| 267 | 3:3 | nghz | ἀνόητοί | 1 | See how you translated the word ** foolish** in [3:1](../03/01.md) where it is used with the same meaning. | ||
| 268 | 3:3 | vof3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἐναρξάμενοι Πνεύματι, νῦν σαρκὶ ἐπιτελεῖσθε | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about what they are doing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 269 | 3:3 | croz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐναρξάμενοι | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Having begun the Christian life” or “Having begun your new relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 270 | 3:3 | xff5 | Πνεύματι | 1 | The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit. | ||
| 271 | 3:3 | xu4d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | σαρκὶ | 1 | Paul is describing the actions a person does while in their body by association with their body, which he calls **flesh**. Here, **flesh** refers to a reliance on one’s own effort in doing outward deeds and doing these actions with a self-sufficient and self-reliant trust in them instead of trusting God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “by your own effort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 272 | 3:4 | iyj1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to try to make the Galatian believers think about the implications of believing and following the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 273 | 3:4 | xujz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ | 1 | The original word that Paul used which is translated as **experienced** by the ULT could refer to: (1) the spiritual privileges and blessings that the Galatian believers had experienced such as receiving God’s Spirit when they believed in Jesus and God “working miracles” among them, both of which are mentioned in the next verse. If your language does not allow you to use a neutral term but rather requires a more specific term you could specify that the things the Galatians experienced were good things as modeled by the UST. (2) experiencing bad things such as suffering. If this is what Paul means here, then he is referring to the suffering that the Galatians believers experienced when they were persecuted. Alternate translation: “Keep in mind that if what God has done for you was because of your obeying the laws that God gave to Moses and not because of trusting in Christ, did you not suffer many things needlessly? I certainly hope that you did not suffer like that needlessly” (3) both good things and bad things here and be referring to both the persecution that the Galatians had experienced and the spiritual blessings that they had experienced. Because it is not known for sure what type of things that Paul is referring to, if possible you should try to use a neutral term or expression. You could then translate this rhetorical question as the ULT does or with a similar neutral phrase such as “Did all the things that happened to you not cause you to think about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 274 | 3:4 | mvad | ἐπάθετε | 1 | Alternate translation: “Did you experience” | ||
| 275 | 3:4 | nq68 | εἰκῇ & καὶ εἰκῇ | 1 | Alternate translation: “uselessly … it was really uselessly” or “in vain … it was really in vain” or “for no purpose … it was really for no purpose” | ||
| 276 | 3:4 | xl9l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo | εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ | 1 | The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** shows contingency regarding his rhetorical question **Have you experienced so many things for nothing** and shows that Paul still has hope for the Galatians. Paul hopes that the Galatians will not make the **many things** that they have **experienced** be **for nothing** by following the false teachers who were teaching that it was necessary that they follow the laws of Moses such as circumcision and the dietary laws it required. Paul is making a hypothetical statement to help his readers recognize the serious implications of following the teachings of the false teachers instead of trusting in Jesus alone. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was really for nothing that you experienced so many things, but I hope with you that this is not the case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) | |
| 277 | 3:4 | mx8b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ | 1 | The phrase **if indeed it was really for nothing** is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to help the Galatians think about what he is saying and to show that he still has hope that they will not follow the teachings of the false teachers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 278 | 3:5 | fuzy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὁ οὖν ἐπιχορηγῶν ὑμῖν τὸ Πνεῦμα καὶ ἐνεργῶν δυνάμεις ἐν ὑμῖν, ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως | 1 | This entire verse is a rhetorical question. Paul is using the question form here to teach the Galatians a truth by engaging their reasoning. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God who gives you his Spirit and does miracles among you does not do these things because you obey the law of Moses. Surely you must know that God gives you these blessings because you believed the good news about the Messiah when you heart it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 279 | 3:5 | upx9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ | 1 | Here, the phrase **the one** refers to “God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who is the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 280 | 3:5 | xoax | Πνεῦμα | 1 | The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit. | ||
| 281 | 3:5 | qnkz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **by hearing of faith** in [3:02](../03/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 282 | 3:5 | s3bc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἢ ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως | 1 | Paul asks another rhetorical question to remind the Galatians how people receive the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 283 | 3:5 | j4vz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐξ ἔργων νόμου | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **by works of the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs three times. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 284 | 3:5 | e17q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐξ ἀκοῆς πίστεως | 1 | Your language may require that what the people heard and whom they trusted be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “because you heard the message and had faith in Jesus” or “because you listened to the message and trusted in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 285 | 3:6 | ahy9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | καθὼς | 1 | # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, the phrase **Just as** indicates that what follows is connected to what precedes it, specifically [3:1-5](../03/01.md). The phrase **Just as** is also introducing new information. The new information that this phrase is introducing is the biblical example of Abraham. Use a form that would be appropriate in this context. Alternate translation: “Even as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 286 | 3:6 | iv9t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐπίστευσεν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | Here, Paul quotes Genesis 15:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning and end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) | |
| 287 | 3:6 | ohbw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐλογίσθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God credited it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 288 | 3:6 | ghuy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐλογίσθη | 1 | Here, the word **it** refers to Abraham’s belief in God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God credited his belief” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 289 | 3:6 | f7sv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνην | 1 | See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 290 | 3:7 | i9x4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | οἱ ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 291 | 3:7 | rh9q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οἱ ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | Your language may require you to state the object of **faith**. Here, the phrase **by faith** is probably a shortened way of of saying “who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ”. Here, the phrase **by faith** is equivalent or similar in meaning to the phrase “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ”. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the ones who by faith in Christ are trusting God to consider them righteous” or “the ones who are trusting God to consider them righteous because they believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 292 | 3:7 | kq1h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | υἱοί & Ἀβραὰμ | 1 | People who have faith in God, as Abraham did, are here spoken of as if they were Abraham’s **sons**. Paul does not mean that people who have faith in God are Abraham’s biological descendants but rather he is saying that they share a spiritual similarity to him because they believe in God, therefore Paul calls them **sons of Abraham**. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of Abraham** in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way or use a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 293 | 3:7 | pq0z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | υἱοί | 1 | Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 294 | 3:8 | vs1m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | προϊδοῦσα & ἡ Γραφὴ, ὅτι ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοῖ τὰ ἔθνη ὁ Θεὸς, προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ | 1 | Here, **the Scripture** is spoken of as though it were a person who could foresee **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith** and **preach the gospel**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 295 | 3:8 | wws9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | ἡ Γραφὴ | 1 | Here, the phrase **the Scripture** could refer to: (1) The Scriptures as a whole, referring here to the entire Old Testament. If you are are using capitalization, or some other convention, to indicate when the words “Scripture” and “Scriptures” refer to the entirety of the collected writings of the Bible use that convention here. Here, “Scripture” would only refer to the Old Testament since the New Testament was still in the process of being written at this time. Most likely Paul is referring to the entire Old Testament when he says “the Scripture” here, and then when he quotes Genesis 12:3 at the end of this verse he is giving a specific example of a passage within the Old Testament that teaches **that God would justify the Gentiles by faith**. (2) just the specific scripture reference which is cited at the end of this verse, Genesis 12:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 296 | 3:8 | htbq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the object of **faith** explicitly. Alternate translation: “by their faith in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 297 | 3:8 | ojbm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”. Alternate translation: “by their believing in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 298 | 3:8 | f6ly | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | προευηγγελίσατο τῷ Ἀβραὰμ | 1 | The sentence **In you all the nations will be blessed** is a quotation from Genesis 12:3. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham where it is written” or “preached the gospel beforehand to Abraham when Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 299 | 3:8 | j83j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | πάντα τὰ ἔθνη | 1 | Here, the term **nations** refers to the people who make up these **nations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all the nations” or “people from every nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 300 | 3:8 | qf98 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐνευλογηθήσονται ἐν σοὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “In you God will bless all the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 301 | 3:9 | ss1b | ὥστε | 1 | Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Consequently” | ||
| 302 | 3:9 | l1bq | οἱ ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **the ones by faith** in [3:7](../03/7.md) where it is used with the same meaning. | ||
| 303 | 3:9 | m5ef | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οἱ ἐκ πίστεως εὐλογοῦνται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones by faith are the ones that God will bless” or “the ones who believe are blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 304 | 3:10 | r5bm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅσοι & ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἰσὶν | 1 | Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is probably a shortened way of saying “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous”. Here, the phrase **of works of the law** is similar in meaning to the phrase “by works of the law” in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it occurs in the phrase “no man is justified by works of the law”. Here, the phrase **as many as are of works of the law** is describing people who rely on the **works of the law** and is in contrast to the phrase “the ones by faith” in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly here. Alternate translation: “as many as rely on the works of the law as the basis for being righteous before God” or “as many as are relying on works of the law as the basis for God considering them to be righteous” or “as many as are trusting that God will consider them righteous because they try to obey the Law of Moses” or “as many as are seeking for God to consider them righteous on the basis of following what the Mosaic Law commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 305 | 3:10 | uz3y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐξ ἔργων νόμου | 1 | ||
| 306 | 3:10 | fv3c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γέγραπται & γεγραμμένοις | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 307 | 3:10 | mxe7 | ὅσοι γὰρ ἐξ ἔργων νόμου | 1 | Alternate translation: “All people who follow the law” or “Everyone who tries to be justified through obeying the law” | ||
| 308 | 3:10 | jhr2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν | 1 | Here, **under a curse** represents being cursed by God and refers to being condemned by God and therefore being doomed to eternal punishment. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “are cursed by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 309 | 3:10 | bin9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὑπὸ κατάραν εἰσίν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “curse”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will curse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 310 | 3:10 | uj98 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | γέγραπται | 1 | Here, Paul uses the phrase **it is written** to indicate that what follows is a quotation from the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 311 | 3:11 | zyvq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐν νόμῳ, οὐδεὶς δικαιοῦται παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God justifies no one by the law” or “God justifies no one as a result of their seeking to obey the Law of Moses” or “God justifies no person on the basis of doing what the Law of Moses commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 312 | 3:11 | sn9h | δῆλον | 1 | Alternate translation: “is evident” | ||
| 313 | 3:11 | e2hj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ὅτι | 2 | The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “because it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 314 | 3:11 | qiab | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται | 1 | The sentence **The righteous will live by faith** is a quotation from Habakkuk 2:4. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 315 | 3:11 | i537 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται | 1 | Paul is citing the prophet Habakkuk who is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “People who are righteous will live by their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 316 | 3:11 | h7t4 | ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται | 1 | The phrase **by faith** could be connected to: (1) the phrase **will live** and be describing the ongoing means by which a righteous person has spiritual life, namely by their faith. Alternate translation: “The righteous person has life through their faith” or “The righteous person lives as a result of their faith” “The righteous person has spiritual life as a result of their faith” (2) the phrase **the righteous** and be describing the means by which God considers a sinful person to be **righteous*, namely by their having faith in him. Alternate translation: “The person who is made right with God as a result of their faith will live” or “Every person whose record of sins God erases because that person trusts God will live spiritually” | ||
| 317 | 3:11 | osgj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe,” or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by believing” or “because they believe” or “by believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 318 | 3:11 | e610 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the object of **faith** here is God. Alternate translation: “by believing in God” or “because they believe in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 319 | 3:12 | jr9l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | The word **Now** indicates that Paul is introducing new information into his argument and it also indicates that Paul is introducing information that will be in contrast with his statement in [3:11](../03/11.md), that “the law” is not able to justify a person. Use a natural form in your language for indicating these things. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 320 | 3:12 | hr2x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 321 | 3:12 | r7i7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ & νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | Here, the phrase **the law is not by faith** means that the Law of Moses is not based on faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the Law of Moses is not founded on faith” or “the Law of Moses is not dependent upon faith” or “when God gave his laws to the Jews he did not make them dependent upon a person believing in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 322 | 3:12 | fml8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ | 1 | What follows the word **but** here is indicating a contrast between **law** and **faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 323 | 3:12 | opyp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἀλλ’ | 1 | The phrase **The one doing these things will live in them** is a quotation from Leviticus 18:5. Use a natural way of introducing direct quotations from an important or sacred text. Alternate translation: “but as it is written in Scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 324 | 3:12 | khuu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | αὐτὰ | 1 | The phrase **these things” refers to God’s “statutes” and “laws” which are mentioned in the first part of Leviticus 18:5. Paul is citing the second half of Leviticus 18:5 here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly in your translation what “these things” refers to. Alternate translation: “these law and statutes of mine” or “my law and statutes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 325 | 3:12 | rep5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς | 1 | Here, the phrase **will live in them** means FILL or DELETE. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will live because of them” or “will because he obeyed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 326 | 3:13 | iql5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐξηγόρασεν | 1 | Paul uses the metaphor of a person buying back lost property or buying the freedom of a slave as a picture of God sending Jesus to pay for people’s sins by dying on the cross. If your readers would not understand what **redeem** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 327 | 3:13 | ml63 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς κατάρας & κατάρα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **curse**, you could express the same idea with a verb phrase as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 328 | 3:13 | vqc3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | κατάρα | 1 | By using the phrase **a curse** Paul is describing a person who is cursed by God by association with the **curse** itself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “one who was cursed” or “one who was cursed by God” or “one who God cursed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 329 | 3:13 | vaay | ὑπὲρ | 1 | Alternate translation: “for” | ||
| 330 | 3:13 | p5m9 | ὅτι γέγραπται | 1 | The phrase **for it is written** is introducing a quotation from Deuteronomy 21:23. See how you translated the phrase **for it is written** in [3:10](../03/10.md) where it is also introducing a quotation from Scripture. | ||
| 331 | 3:13 | vjbr | ἐπικατάρατος πᾶς ὁ | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **Cursed is everyone** in [3:10](../03/10.md). | ||
| 332 | 3:13 | mt6z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ξύλου | 1 | In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the word **tree** can refer to a post made out of wood. Here, Paul is using this term to refer to the wooden cross that Jesus was crucified on. If it would help your readers, use a term which would be applicable to something made of wood and not merely to a live tree. Alternate translation: “a pole” or “a wooden pole” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 333 | 3:14 | brf7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for Christ’s death (which he discussed in the previous verse). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 334 | 3:14 | z38j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εὐλογία | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “bless”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 335 | 3:14 | a0nd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, the word **in** could be used to indicate: (1) by what means **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely “by means of” **Christ Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of Christ Jesus” or “through Christ Jesus” or “by Christ Jesus” (2) the sphere in which **the blessing of Abraham** would **come to the Gentiles**, namely **so that the blessing of Abraham might come to the Gentiles** who are “in the sphere of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “who are in union with Christ Jesus” (3) the reason **the blessing of Abraham** would ** come to the Gentiles**, namely “because of” **Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “because of what Christ Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 336 | 3:14 | gt7z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 2 | Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for **the blessing of Abraham** coming **to the Gentiles**, namely so that **the promise of the Spirit** could be received **through faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 337 | 3:14 | g87i | διὰ | 1 | Alternate translation: “by” | ||
| 338 | 3:14 | agv5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Here, the object of **faith** is Christ. If it would help your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. The phrase **through faith** also occurs in [2:16](../02/16.md), where it has “Jesus Christ” as the object of the phrase “through faith”. Alternate translation: “through faith in Christ” or “through faith in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 339 | 3:14 | qsai | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believing”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 340 | 3:14 | h46q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | λάβωμεν | 1 | When Paul says **we** he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so **we** would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 341 | 3:14 | ezpz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a verb form such as “promised”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 342 | 3:14 | vce3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to explain what the **promise** is regarding. Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that the **promise** he is referring to here is the promise regarding the coming Holy Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “promise regarding the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 343 | 3:14 | l6oj | Πνεῦμα | 1 | The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit. | ||
| 344 | 3:15 | al9b | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the term “brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters” | ||
| 345 | 3:15 | c3gs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ ἄνθρωπον | 1 | Here, Paul uses the phrase **according to man** to means that he is speaking in accord with the manner of human practice. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “with a human analogy from human legal practice” or “using an analogy from standard daily life”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 346 | 3:15 | bfjq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | κατὰ ἄνθρωπον | 1 | Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to humans in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to human practice” or “using an analogy from standard human practice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 347 | 3:15 | si56 | ὅμως | 1 | Here, the word **Nevertheless** could be: (1) indicating a concession. Paul is admitting or conceding that the analogy from human legal affairs that he is about to use is imperfect, **Nevertheless** he is going to use it to illustrate a spiritual truth. (2) indicating a comparison. Alternate translation: “similarly” or “likewise” | ||
| 348 | 3:15 | jrdg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which people have established” or “which men have established” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 349 | 3:15 | rbir | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ἀνθρώπου κεκυρωμένην διαθήκην, οὐδεὶς ἀθετεῖ ἢ ἐπιδιατάσσεται | 1 | Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “no one sets aside or adds to a covenant which people have established” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) | |
| 350 | 3:15 | zu16 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to people in general. If your readers would misunderstand this you can indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 351 | 3:16 | f1xu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** could indicate: (1) that Paul is introducing additional information into his ongoing argument. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” (2) a transition. Alternate translation: “But note that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 352 | 3:16 | hdfm | ἐπαγγελίαι | 1 | See how you translated the word “promise” in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 353 | 3:16 | rreg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ & τοῖς σπέρμασιν & τῷ σπέρματί σου | 1 | Here, the term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If your readers would not understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 354 | 3:16 | x8m7 | τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ & τοῖς σπέρμασιν & τῷ σπέρματί σου | 1 | In order to correctly communicate Paul’s meaning here it is important to translate both occurrences of the word **seed** with a singular form and to translate the single occurrence of the word **seeds** with a plural form that indicates more than one. | ||
| 355 | 3:16 | j9x7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐ λέγει | 1 | Here, the word **He** could: (1) refer to God speaking to Abraham. By using the phrase **and to your seed** Paul is referring to multiple passages in the book of Genesis where God made promises to Abraham and his **seed**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **He** refers to the God. Alternate translation: “God does not say” (2) be translated as “It” and be referring to the various passages in Genesis which record that God spoke promises to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that **It** refers to Scripture. Alternate translation: “Scripture does not say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 356 | 3:16 | w3wl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὡς ἐπὶ πολλῶν, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐφ’ ἑνός | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as speaking about many, but as speaking about one” or “as referring to many, but as referring to one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 357 | 3:16 | t25e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you | σου | 1 | The word **your** is singular and refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) | |
| 358 | 3:17 | pdd3 | δὲ | 1 | Alternate translation: “And” | ||
| 359 | 3:17 | h36m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers | τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη | 1 | Alternate translation: “four hundred and thirty years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) | |
| 360 | 3:17 | v3gq | διαθήκην | 1 | See how you translated the word “covenant” in [3:15](../03/15.md). | ||
| 361 | 3:17 | qn7j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | προκεκυρωμένην ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which God established previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 362 | 3:17 | fmw4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς τὸ καταργῆσαι | 1 | Here, the word **to** introduces what the result would have been if **the law** had **set aside the covenant previously established by God**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “so as to nullify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 363 | 3:17 | ydsw | ἐπαγγελίαν | 1 | See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 364 | 3:18 | ujg2 | εἰ & ἐκ & ἡ κληρονομία, οὐκέτι ἐξ | 1 | Alternate translation: “if the inheritance is from … then it is no longer from” | ||
| 365 | 3:18 | c8fu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡ κληρονομία | 1 | Paul speaks of God’s blessings to those who believe in him as if they were an **inheritance**. If your readers would not understand what **inheritance** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the blessing” or “God’s blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 366 | 3:18 | h1xv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ νόμου & οὐκέτι ἐξ | 1 | Alternate translation: “is by the law, it is no longer by” or “is based on the law, it is no longer based on” or “comes from the law, it no longer comes from” | |
| 367 | 3:18 | pe31 | ἐπαγγελίας & ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 368 | 3:18 | q6jq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to the idea that **the inheritance is from the law**. Instead, Paul points out that **the inheritance** is based on God’s promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 369 | 3:18 | xsep | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κεχάρισται | 1 | Here, the word **it** refers to **the inheritance** mentioned earlier in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “has graciously given the inheritance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 370 | 3:18 | ue27 | δι’ | 1 | Here, the word **through** is indicating means and is introducing the means through which God gave **the inheritance … to Abraham**, namely **through a promise**. Use a natural form in your language for indicating the means by which something happens. | ||
| 371 | 3:19 | kx2e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ὁ νόμος | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have regarding the purpose of the law and to introduce his answer to this anticipated question. If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what the purpose of the law is” or “Let me tell you why God added the law to the covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 372 | 3:19 | mnw2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὁ νόμος | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was the law given” or “did God give the law” or “was the law added” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 373 | 3:19 | uk9m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | προσετέθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God added it” or “God added the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 374 | 3:19 | yf5t | τῶν παραβάσεων χάριν προσετέθη | 1 | The phrase **because of transgressions** could refer to: (1) the purpose that **the law … was added** to the covenant with Abraham, namely the law **was added** to the covenant “for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “for the purpose of showing people what sin is”. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the purpose that **the law … was added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted show them what sin was by giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added for the purpose of showing what transgression is” or “It was added for the purpose of showing people what sin is” (2) what caused God to decide that **the law** should be **added** to the covenant with Abraham. This phrase would then mean that what caused God to add **the law** to the covenant was because people were committing transgressions. The phrase **because of transgressions** would then be stating the cause for **the law** being **added**, namely because people were sinning and God wanted to correct people’s wrong and sinful behavior by showing them what righteous behavior was and so he gave **the law**. Alternate translation: “It was added because people were committing transgressions” or “It was added because people were sinning” | ||
| 375 | 3:19 | phd5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῶν παραβάσεων | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgressions**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “sinful”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 376 | 3:19 | cf66 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 377 | 3:19 | lxcw | διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων | 1 | Translate the phrase **through angels** in a way that indicates that God was the source of the law and not angels. God was the source of the law but he used angels to give the law Moses. The Bible records in Deuteronomy 33:2; Hebrews 2:2; and Acts 7:38, 53 that God used angels to give Moses his law and this is what Jewish people believed regarding how God delivered his law to Moses. Alternate translation: “and God used angels to put it into effect” or “God gave the law through angels” or “God put the law into effect through angels” | ||
| 378 | 3:19 | v74y | ἄχρις οὗ ἔλθῃ τὸ σπέρμα ᾧ ἐπήγγελται, διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου | 1 | When Paul says that **the law** was administered **by the hand of a mediator (Moses) until the seed would come to whom the promise had been made** his point is that **the law** was temporary and only needed **until the seed (Christ) would come**. By saying this, Paul is implicitly telling the Galatian believers that the law was temporary, and only needed until Christ, whom he calls **the seed**, came. | ||
| 379 | 3:19 | bgi6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου | 1 | The phrase **by the hand of** is an idiom which means “through.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “through a mediator” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 380 | 3:19 | edcu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μεσίτου | 1 | Here, the **mediator** that Paul is referring to is Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of Moses who acted as a mediator” or “of Moses who acted as a go-between” or “of Moses who acted as an intermediary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 381 | 3:19 | m67a | σπέρμα | 1 | See how you translated the word **seed** in [3:16](../03/16.md) where it is used with the same meaning. | ||
| 382 | 3:19 | hrzb | ἐπήγγελται | 1 | See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 383 | 3:19 | nl4h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐπήγγελται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God had made the promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 384 | 3:20 | x9l1 | ὁ δὲ μεσίτης ἑνὸς οὐκ ἔστιν | 1 | In this verse Paul is proving to the Galatian believers that God’s promise to Abraham is superior to the law that he gave Moses. What Paul means by saying **a mediator is not for one** is that a mediator is not needed when one person is speaking with another person directly. Paul is implicitly expressing to the Galatian believers that the promise to Abraham is superior to the law because it was not given through a mediator but rather God gave the promise directly to Abraham. If it would help your readers you could indicate that in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section. | ||
| 385 | 3:20 | pqtm | μεσίτης | 1 | See how you translated the term **mediator** in [3:19](../03/19.md). | ||
| 386 | 3:20 | y3ix | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἑνὸς | 1 | The phrase **for one** leaves the object implied. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what **one** is referring to. Alternate translation: “for one party alone” or “needed for one party” or “needed when there is only one party involved” or “is not needed as a go-between when only one party is involved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 387 | 3:20 | lhui | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 2 | What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to the opening statement in this verse that **a mediator is not for one**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 388 | 3:20 | l2b6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δὲ | 2 | Here, the phrase **God is one** is a quote from Deuteronomy 6:4 which the Galatians believers would have been familiar with. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the phrase **God is one** is cited from Scripture. Alternate translation: “but as God has said in Scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 389 | 3:20 | cle8 | Θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν | 1 | There are many different views among Bible scholars as to exactly what Paul means by using the phrase **God is one** here and how it is related to the phrase **a mediator is not for one** earlier in the verse. The most likely interpretation is that expressed by the UST. See the Chapter 3 General Notes section “Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter” for more information regarding this section. | ||
| 390 | 3:21 | zwk0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὁ & νόμος κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to anticipate a question that the Galatian believers might have and to introduce his answer to the question which begins with the phrase **if a was given being able to make alive...** If it would help your readers, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “you might think that the law is against the promises” or “you might think that the law is opposed to the promises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 391 | 3:21 | e43u | κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν | 1 | Alternate translation: “opposed to the promises” or “in conflict with the promises” | ||
| 392 | 3:21 | ee7y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν | 1 | The phrase **the promises** refers to the promises that God made to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promises that God made to Abraham” or “God’s promises to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 393 | 3:21 | q7su | ἐπαγγελιῶν | 1 | See how you translated the word “promise” in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 394 | 3:21 | nd97 | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | **May it never be** is an emphatic way of negating a statement. The statement that the phrase **May it never be** is negating is the proposed question **is the law against the promises**. Use a natural word or expression for strongly negating an idea. Alternate translation: “Certainly not!” | ||
| 395 | 3:21 | jnwe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ & ἐδόθη νόμος ὁ δυνάμενος ζῳοποιῆσαι, ὄντως | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Galatian believers. Alternate translation: “if it was possible that a law was given that was able to make people alive, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 396 | 3:21 | bjpb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐδόθη νόμος | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God gave a law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 397 | 3:21 | dljp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζῳοποιῆσαι | 1 | Here, it is implied that Paul is referring to making “people” alive. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make people alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 398 | 3:21 | skc0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | ζῳοποιῆσαι | 1 | The phrase **to make alive** could refer to: (1) both eternal life in the future and to making people spiritually alive in the present. Paul is probably referring to both here since in this letter Paul discusses the important role of the Holy Spirit and the fact that the Holy Spirit is given through faith and not the law. (2) eternal life in the future after a person dies. If it is possible in your language, it would be best to retain a general phrase as modeled by the ULT, since Paul does not explain the phrase **to make alive**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 399 | 3:21 | nebi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ δικαιοσύνη | 1 | See how you translated the word **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 400 | 3:21 | iyg9 | ἐν νόμου ἂν ἦν ἡ δικαιοσύνη | 1 | Alternate translation: “we could have become righteous by obeying that law” | ||
| 401 | 3:22 | smkw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is indicating a strong contrast between the hypothetical (and false) possibility that “the law” could make a person righteous. Paul is using the word **But** here to indicate this strong contrast and to introduce his explanation of what the law actually does. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 402 | 3:22 | yzcp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If your readers would not understand what **imprisoned all things under sin** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 403 | 3:22 | upkg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | συνέκλεισεν ἡ Γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of **the Scripture** as though it were a person who is an authority figure who **imprisoned** people in a prison and he speaks of **sin** as though it were a jailer who keeps people imprisoned so that they cannot break free. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 404 | 3:22 | jbn7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἡ Γραφὴ | 1 | Here, the word **Scripture** could: (1) refer to all of the Old Testament scriptures. Use whatever convention you are using to indicate this. The ULT indicates when the word **Scripture** refers to the entire Bible, or the entire Old Testament, by capitalizing the word **Scripture**. (2) refer to a particular passage of Scripture such as Deuteronomy 27:26 or some other Old Testament passage. Alternate translation: “the scripture” | |
| 405 | 3:22 | dxqc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἡ Γραφὴ | 1 | Paul is describing “God” doing something by association with his Word, **the Scripture**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 406 | 3:22 | mk9g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὰ πάντα | 1 | Here, the phrase **all things* could refer to: (1) all people. If your language requires you to indicate explicitly what **all things** refers to, you could indicate that it refers to “people,” but if it doesn’t you could use a general expression as modeled by the ULT. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the entire creation and the things which make up this present fallen world. See Romans 8:18-22. If you decide that this is what Paul means you should use a general phrase such as **all things** as the ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 407 | 3:22 | dt14 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | Here, the phrase **under sin** refers to being “under the power of sin.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the power of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 408 | 3:22 | xqmi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Following the phrase **so that** Paul states the purpose for which **the Scripture imprisoned all things under sin**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 409 | 3:22 | pvv3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might give the promise by faith in Jesus Christ to the ones believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 410 | 3:22 | o9ap | ἐπαγγελία | 1 | See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 411 | 3:22 | elb4 | ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοθῇ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν | 1 | Alternate translation: “God’s promise to Abraham which is received through faith in Jesus Christ might be given to the those who believe” | ||
| 412 | 3:22 | ib27 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ ἐπαγγελία | 1 | The phrase **the promise** refers to the promise given to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise given to Abraham” or “the promise that God gave to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 413 | 3:22 | jyvn | ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | See how you translated the phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md). The phrase “through faith in Jesus Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md) has basically the exact same meaning as the phrase **by faith in Jesus Christ** does in this verse. | ||
| 414 | 3:22 | bo1b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 415 | 3:23 | jzut | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν πίστιν & τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusting” or “believe”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 416 | 3:23 | ztcj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πρὸ τοῦ & ἐλθεῖν τὴν πίστιν | 1 | The phrase **before the faith came** means “before faith in Jesus Christ came.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “before faith in Jesus Christ came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 417 | 3:23 | su16 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι | 1 | Here, Paul is continuing the metaphor of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. The power that **the law** had over humans us is spoken of as if the law were a prison guard holding people captive. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **held captive** by the law in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 418 | 3:23 | aue6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ | 1 | Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 419 | 3:23 | r5y3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα, συνκλειόμενοι | 1 | Here, Paul is continuing his personification of **the law** that he began in the previous verse. Paul speaks of **the law** as though it were a jailer who **held** people **captive** and kept them **imprisoned** up **until** the time when the coming **faith** in Jesus Christ would **be revealed**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 420 | 3:23 | e729 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law held us captive under its power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 421 | 3:23 | xmur | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | συνκλειόμενοι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the first half of the verse states that **the law** did it. Alternate translation: “and the law imprisoned us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 422 | 3:23 | way9 | εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι | 1 | Here, the word **until** could: (1) refer to time and introduce the time period at which people being **imprisoned** under the law would terminate, namely **until** the time when God would reveal Jesus Christ as an object of faith. Alternate translation: “until God would reveal the message about trusting in Christ that he was about to reveal” (2) be translated as “to” and be indicating the purpose for people being **imprisoned** under the law, namely so that people would be ready for the coming faith in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “in order to lead us to believe in the good news that God was about to reveal” or “in order that we might be ready to believe the good news concerning Christ, the news that God would reveal later” | ||
| 423 | 3:23 | rz75 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὴν & πίστιν | 2 | The phrase **the faith** means “the faith in Jesus Christ.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the faith in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 424 | 3:23 | t32j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “until the faith that God was about to reveal” or “until the faith that God would soon reveal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 425 | 3:24 | we2y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | Here, the phrase **So then** is introducing a result. Use a natural form for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “Thus” or “Therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 426 | 3:24 | mcdn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ νόμος, παιδαγωγὸς ἡμῶν γέγονεν | 1 | Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a **guardian**. If your readers would not understand what a **guardian** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning by using a simile as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 427 | 3:24 | amrv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | παιδαγωγὸς | 1 | In Paul’s culture a **guardian** was a slave whose job was to discipline and take care of a child who was not yet an adult. If your readers would not be familiar with this term you could either explain the meaning of this word in your translation, as modeled by the UST, or you could use the term from your culture that comes the closes to expressing the meaning of this word and then write a footnote explaining this word if you are using footnotes in your translation. Alternate translation: “custodian” or “guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 428 | 3:24 | ln1s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | παιδαγωγὸς | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of **the law** as though it were a **guardian** whose job or role was to watch over people’s actions **until Christ** came. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 429 | 3:24 | p30v | εἰς | 1 | See how you translated the word **until** in [3:23](../03/23.md). | ||
| 430 | 3:24 | zick | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which **the law became our guardian until Christ** which was for the intended purpose that **we might be justified by faith** in Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “with the purpose that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 431 | 3:24 | s8g5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιωθῶμεν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God would declare us to be righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 432 | 3:24 | j1xp | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **by faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md) where it is used with the same meaning. | ||
| 433 | 3:24 | vj5u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ | 1 | Here, the word **by** is indicating the basis or source of God’s act of justifying sinners. It is indicating that **faith** is the basis on which **we might be justfied.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of” or “by means of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 434 | 3:24 | kw1h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 435 | 3:24 | wuco | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πίστεως | 1 | Here, the context implies (and also Paul’s use of the similar phrase “by faith in Christ” in [2:16](../02/16.md)), that the object of **faith** is **Christ**. If it would be helpful to your readers to state the object of faith here, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 436 | 3:25 | x257 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. What follows the word **But** is in contrast to the way things were in the era before Christ came. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 437 | 3:25 | a4pk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusting”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 438 | 3:25 | meot | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Here, the context implies that the object of **faith** is “Christ.” If it would be helpful to your readers to state the object of faith here, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 439 | 3:25 | efvh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὑπὸ παιδαγωγόν | 1 | Here, Paul continues the metaphor he began in [3:24](../03/24.md) by continuing to speak of “the law” as if it were a **guardian**. If your readers would not understand what the term **guardian** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 440 | 3:25 | be13 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὑπὸ παιδαγωγόν | 1 | Here, Paul speaking of “the law” as though it were a person who was a **guardian**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 441 | 3:25 | kjvy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ | 1 | Here, the word **under** means “under the supervision of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the supervision of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 442 | 3:25 | gwst | παιδαγωγόν | 1 | See how you translated the word **guardian** in [3:24](../03/24.md). | ||
| 443 | 3:26 | tzqa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | υἱοὶ | 1 | Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women who have **faith in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters” of “children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 444 | 3:26 | u0ma | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | υἱοὶ | 1 | Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 445 | 3:26 | mwku | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trusted,” as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 446 | 3:26 | kht6 | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could mean: (1) that the spiritual position of the Galatian believers was “in Christ Jesus.” Alternate translation: “being in union with Christ Jesus” or “you are in union with Christ Jesus” (2) that **Christ Jesus** was the object of Galatian believers faith. Alternate translation: “which is in Christ Jesus” or “towards Christ Jesus” | ||
| 447 | 3:27 | p0dy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** indicates that what follows is an explanation giving the reason for why Paul said “you are all sons of God” in [3:26](../03/26.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing information which proves and/or explains a prior statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 448 | 3:27 | yicn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅσοι | 1 | The phrase **as many as** means “as many of you as.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many of you as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 449 | 3:27 | h5ax | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅσοι & ἐβαπτίσθητε | 1 | The phrase **as many as have** means “all of you who have.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of you who have been baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 450 | 3:27 | v6n1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐβαπτίσθητε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “a person” did it. Alternate translation: “someone has baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 451 | 3:27 | ucuk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε | 1 | Paul speaks of being **baptized into Christ** as if **Christ** were a physical location into which someone could be baptized. Here, **into Christ** refers to being spiritually united with Christ and coming into close spiritual union with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly. Alternative translation: “have been baptized into close spiritual union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 452 | 3:27 | dgkv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε, Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε | 1 | By speaking of baptism, Paul could be describing all of the things which belong to a believers initial conversion experience. Paul would then be associating all of them with one part of their conversion experience, water baptism, in which case baptism is an abbreviated way of referring conversion and the things that are part of it such as belief in Christ, baptism, and receiving Holy Spirit. If you decide that this is what Paul means here, and if it would help your readers, you could indicate this explicitly or you could explain this in a footnote if you are using them. Alternate translation: “God has saved have put on Christ” or “have believed in Christ have put on Christ” or “have experienced God’s salvation have put on Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 453 | 3:27 | di9v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε | 1 | Paul speaks of **Christ** as if he were clothing that those who believe in him have **put on**. Here, when Paul says that all believers have **put on Christ** he means that all believers have identified with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 454 | 3:28 | srk1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ, πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, the word **for** introduces the reason for why (if someone is a believer in Christ) it is as if there is no longer **Jew nor Greek** or **slave** or **free** or **male** or **female**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase (which follows the word **for**) gives the reason for the result that the first part of this verse describes. Alternate translation: “Because you are all one in Christ Jesus, there is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 455 | 3:28 | tu05 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ, πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | In this verse, Paul’s point is that people who believe in Christ are no longer divided by racial, social, or gender distinctions but rather now have **one** common identity. This new common identity is that they are now **in (union with) Christ**. Paul is not saying that these human distinction no longer exist, rather he is saying that they now cease to be significant because believers have a new spiritual identity, which is being **in Christ**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “For you who are believers, it is now as if there is neither Jew nor Greek, or slave or free, or male or female” or “For you who believe in Christ, it is now as if there is neither Jew nor Greek, or slave or free, or male or female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 456 | 3:28 | aonk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐκ & Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand these double negatives, you could translate each double negative using only one negative word. Alternate translation: “neither Jew or Greek, there is neither slave or free, there is neither male or female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) | |
| 457 | 3:28 | zxfp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἕλλην | 1 | Here, the term **Greek** refers to non-Jewish people. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece or to people who speak the Greek language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 458 | 3:28 | pfrh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐλεύθερος | 1 | Here, the term **free** refers to people who are not slaves and thus are free from bondage to a master. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “free person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 459 | 3:28 | fy09 | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **for** introduces a reason. Use a natural form for introducing the reason for something that was said previously. Alternate translation: “because” | ||
| 460 | 3:28 | fakq | πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς εἷς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Alternate translation: “because all of you are together joined to the Messiah Jesus” | ||
| 461 | 3:28 | mppd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἷς | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **one** to indicate that all believers share the same equal position because of their new identity which they have by being **in Christ**. (Paul is further explaining his statement from the previous verse in which he says that all believers have “put on Christ”, meaning that they have a new and common identity which is derived from and centers on Christ). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what **one** means here. Alternate translation: “one person” or “one and the same standing” or “of equal standing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 462 | 3:28 | pddu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Paul speaks of believers being **in Christ Jesus** as if **Christ Jesus** were a physical location into which someone could be. Here, **into Christ** refers to being spiritually united with Christ in a close spiritual union. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of this phrase plainly. Alternative translation: “have been baptized into close spiritual union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 463 | 3:29 | lnlp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, Paul is using the word **Now** to introduce new information. Use a natural form for introducing new information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 464 | 3:29 | ovzy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ & ἄρα | 1 | Paul is using an **if … then” statement to express a hypothetical condition and what the result is for those people who meet the requirement of the condition. Paul is telling the Galatians that **if** they belong to Christ **then** they are Abrahams spiritual descendents. Use a natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical condition. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 465 | 3:29 | lth0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμεῖς & ἐστέ | 1 | Here, both occurrences of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark these forms as plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 466 | 3:29 | wceh | ὑμεῖς Χριστοῦ | 1 | Alternate translation: “you are Christ’s” or “you belong to Christ” | ||
| 467 | 3:29 | xwrj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σπέρμα | 1 | Here, the term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If your readers would not understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. See how you translated the word **seed** in [3:16](../03/16.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 468 | 3:29 | qp4z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κληρονόμοι | 1 | Paul speaks of believers, who are the spiritual descendants **of Abraham**, as if they were **heirs** who were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. If your readers would not understand what **heirs** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 469 | 3:29 | au7a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν κληρονόμοι | 1 | If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what the **heirs** will inherit. Alternate translation: “heirs of what God promised to Abraham and his descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 470 | 3:29 | zxr0 | κατ’ | 1 | Alternate translation: “by way of” | ||
| 471 | 3:29 | cu6z | ἐπαγγελίαν | 1 | See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 472 | 4:intro | h6gw | 0 | # Galatians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sonship\n\nSonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Abba, Father\n“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) | |||
| 473 | 4:1 | fr5u | κληρονόμος | 1 | # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the plural form of this word in [3:29](../03/29.md). | ||
| 474 | 4:1 | vlu6 | κύριος πάντων ὤν | 1 | Alternate translation: “though being master of all things” or “even though he is master of all things” or “even though he is the master of all the things he is going to inherit” | ||
| 475 | 4:2 | eyfx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast and indicating that what follows is in contrast to what came before it in the preceding verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 476 | 4:2 | jtpo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐστὶ | 1 | Here, the word **he** refers to “the heir” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heir is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 477 | 4:2 | ppf1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ | 1 | Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 478 | 4:2 | llwi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐπιτρόπους & καὶ οἰκονόμους | 1 | The terms **guardians** and **stewards** refer to two different roles but these terms do not necessarily refer to two different groups of people since one person could have responsibility for filling both roles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “someone who is his guardian and steward” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 479 | 4:2 | bd5a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | ἐπιτρόπους | 1 | A guardian was a person who had the role of being responsible for a child. This person’s job was to supervise and care for the child whom they were in charge of make sure that the child was instructed in what they should do. Use a natural phrase or term in your language for describing this role. If you do not have this role in your culture you could describe it for your readers. Alternate translation: “people supervise a child” or “people who are in charge of a child” or “people who are in charge of a minor” or “people who are responsible for a minor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 480 | 4:2 | v5g9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | οἰκονόμους | 1 | Here, the word **stewards** refers to people who are entrusted with the role of managing property until the child who is the heir is old enough to inherit it. Use a natural phrase or term in your language for describing this role. If you do not have this role in your culture you could describe it for your readers. Alternate translation: “people manage the child’s possessions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 481 | 4:2 | khzl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | προθεσμίας τοῦ πατρός | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the “father” did it. Alternate translation: “date which his father appointed” or “time which his father appointed”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 482 | 4:3 | ocm2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | οὕτως | 1 | Here, the word **So** indicates that what follows is comparable to, and similar in some way to what has just described in [4:1-2](../04/01.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing something that corresponds in some way to something that was introduced previously. Alternate translation: “In a similar way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 483 | 4:3 | d6v9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἦμεν | 1 | # General Information:\n\nThe word **we** here refers to all Christians, including Paul’s readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 484 | 4:3 | n21q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὅτε ἦμεν νήπιοι | 1 | Paul speaks of people who have not yet trusted in Jesus as if they were **children**. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative as modeled by the UST or you could translate this phrase as a simile. Alternate translation: “when we did not yet believe in Jesus” or “when we were like children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 485 | 4:3 | rwwj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου ἤμεθα δεδουλωμένοι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who was doing the action, Paul says that “the elemental principles of the world” were doing it. See the note on personification regarding **the elemental principles of this world**. Alternate translation: “the elemental principles of the world were enslaving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 486 | 4:3 | cd2w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | δεδουλωμένοι | 1 | Paul speaks of being under the control of **the elemental principles of the world** as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 487 | 4:3 | l0fg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ | 1 | Here, the word **under** means “under the power of” or “under the authority of.” See how you translated the word **under** in [4:2](../04/02.md) where Paul uses it with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “under the power of” or “under the authority of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 488 | 4:3 | v1zo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου & δεδουλωμένοι | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of **the elemental principles of the world** as though they were a person who could enslave other people. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. Paul speaks of **the elemental principles of the world** as though they have the power to enslave a person but it is actually humans, who do not yet believe in the Messiah, who willing submit to these **elemental principles** and allow themselves to be enslaved. See [5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 489 | 4:3 | u462 | τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου | 1 | **the elemental principles of the world** could refer to: (1) the religious and/or moral teachings that people, whether they be a Jew or a non-Jew, seek to obey in order to please God and/or think of themselves as praiseworthy and good. (2) the things prescribed by the Mosaic law. 3) spiritual beings which people thought controlled **the world**. | ||
| 490 | 4:4 | ogo3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | The word **But** is introducing a contrast between the time prior to **when the fullness of time came**, which Paul described before this verse, and the time after **the fullness of time came**, which Paul describes in this verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 491 | 4:4 | ujfp | τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ χρόνου | 1 | The phrase **the fullness of time** means “the right time” or “the time that God appointed.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the right time” or “the designated time” or “the appointed time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | ||
| 492 | 4:4 | opx2 | γενόμενον ἐκ γυναικός | 1 | The phrase **born from a woman** is an idiom which means that someone is human. Because Jesus existed as God before he was born on earth the emphasis here is that Jesus became human, in addition to being fully God. If your readers would not understand this idiom means here, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having taken on human nature” or “having become a human being in addition to his divine nature” or “having become a human” or “having been born as a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | ||
| 493 | 4:4 | d9c7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | γενόμενον ὑπὸ νόμον | 1 | The phrase **having been born under the law** means that Jesus, as a Jew, was under the jurisdiction of the law of Moses and therefore it was necessary that he obey it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “having been born under the jurisdiction and requirements of the law of Moses” or “having been born subject to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 494 | 4:4 | mzwh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ νόμον | 1 | Here, the word **under** means “under the authority of” or “under the jurisdiction of.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md) where Paul uses the word **under** with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the law” or “under the jurisdiction of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 495 | 4:4 | zt29 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | νόμον | 1 | Here, the phrase **the law** refers to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 496 | 4:5 | cb45 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **in order that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 497 | 4:5 | v5cb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐξαγοράσῃ | 1 | Paul uses the metaphor of a person buying back lost property or buying the freedom of a slave as a picture of God sending Jesus to pay the price for people’s sins by dying on the cross. If your readers would not understand what **redeem** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 498 | 4:5 | awb9 | ἐξαγοράσῃ | 1 | See how you translated the word “redeemed” in [3:13](../03/13.md). | ||
| 499 | 4:5 | s6fw | ὑπὸ νόμον | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md) and [4:4](../04/04.md) where Paul uses this phrase with the same meaning. | ||
| 500 | 4:5 | nppu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 2 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God redeemed **the ones under the law**, which was **so that** God could adopt them as his spiritual sons and daughters. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” or “with the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 501 | 4:5 | eapv | τὴν υἱοθεσίαν ἀπολάβωμεν | 1 | Alternate translation: “God might adopt us as his sons” | ||
| 502 | 4:5 | ii90 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἀπολάβωμεν | 1 | The word **we** could refer to: (1) all Christians, both Jews and non-Jews, in which case **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (2) Jewish Christians only, in which case **we** would be exclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 503 | 4:5 | tpqc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὴν υἱοθεσίαν ἀπολάβωμεν | 1 | Paul speaks of God giving people a close personal relationship with himself and giving them special rights and privileges as if it were **adoption**. If your readers would not understand what **adoption** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 504 | 4:5 | jris | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | υἱοθεσίαν | 1 | Paul speaks of those who believe in Jesus as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the word **sons** in [3:26](../03/26.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 505 | 4:5 | lq4r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | υἱοθεσίαν | 1 | Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “adoption as children” or “adoption as God’s children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 506 | 4:6 | ahbp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δέ | 1 | Here, Paul is using the word **And** to introduce new information into his ongoing argument. Use a natural form for introducing new information. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 507 | 4:6 | exc6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὅτι | 1 | The word **because** is introducing the reason that **God sent the Spirit of his Son into** the hearts of believers, namely because believers are God’s **sons**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 508 | 4:6 | l2ny | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | υἱοί | 1 | Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 509 | 4:6 | bikp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | υἱοί | 1 | Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if God was their biological, physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the word **sons** in [4:5](../04/25.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 510 | 4:6 | yadl | τὸ Πνεῦμα | 1 | The phrase **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md), where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit. | ||
| 511 | 4:6 | nei3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | εἰς τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Paul is describing the innermost part of a person by association with their physical heart. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent term from your culture that is used to describe the center of a person’s inner being or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 512 | 4:6 | s54r | κρᾶζον | 1 | The phrase **crying out** means “to call out loudly.” This phrase does not mean to cry or weep from sorrow. | ||
| 513 | 4:6 | eqx5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate | Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ | 1 | The word **Abba** is an Aramaic word meaning **Father** which the Jews used to address their fathers. Paul writes it as it sounds in Aramaic (he transliterates it) and then translates its meaning into Greek for his readers. Since the Aramaic word **Abba** is followed by the Greek word **Father**, it is best to transliterate **Abba** and then give its meaning in your language as Paul does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) | |
| 514 | 4:7 | jkor | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | The phrase **So then** introduces the result of what Paul explained in [4:6](../04/06.md). Use a natural form for introducing a result. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 515 | 4:7 | akb8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you | εἶ | 1 | Here,**you** is singular. Paul is probably addressing the Galatian believers by using a singular pronoun in order to emphasize that what he is saying applies to each of them individually. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) | |
| 516 | 4:7 | iler | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | δοῦλος | 1 | Paul speaks of the Galatian believers being in bondage to the law of Moses as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **a slave** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in bondage to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 517 | 4:7 | fzja | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | The word **but** is introducing a contrast. Paul is contrasting being **a son** with being **a slave**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 518 | 4:7 | swk3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | υἱός & υἱός | 1 | See how you translated the word **sons** in [4:5](../04/05.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “a spiritual child of God … a spiritual child of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 519 | 4:7 | vmyo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | υἱός & υἱός | 1 | Although the term **son** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a child … a child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 520 | 4:7 | rlc3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ δὲ υἱός, καὶ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since each of you is a son, you are also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 521 | 4:7 | d5hu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κληρονόμος | 1 | See how you translated the word **heir** in [4:1](../04/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 522 | 4:7 | eujw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κληρονόμος | 1 | If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that Paul is referring to inheriting the promises that God made to Abraham and his descendants. Alternate translation: “an heir of the promises made to Abraham” or “an heir of the promises God made to Abraham”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 523 | 4:7 | po66 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | διὰ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the word **through** is indicating agency. It is indicating that God is the agent by which the Galatians are to inherit the blessings God promised to Abraham and his descendants. Use a natural form for indicating the agency or means by which an action takes place. Alternate translation: “by means of God’s working” or “through God’s working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 524 | 4:8 | v4mp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | The word **But** is introducing a contrast. Paul is contrasting the life of the Galatian believers before they believed in Christ with their life after they came to believe in Christ and as a result became God’s sons (which he explained in [4:1-7](../04/01.md)). Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 525 | 4:8 | e21a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰδότες Θεὸν | 1 | Here, the phrase **known God** means “known God personally” and means more than simply having heard or known some things about God. The phrase **known God** refers to close relationship with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having been in a relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 526 | 4:8 | ukf5 | ἐδουλεύσατε | 1 | # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the word **enslaved** in [4:3](../04/03.md). | ||
| 527 | 4:8 | yx8o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐδουλεύσατε τοῖς φύσει μὴ οὖσι θεοῖς | 1 | Paul speaks of the Galatians former way of life in which they practiced false religions and worshiped false gods as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what being **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 528 | 4:8 | cj5i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῖς φύσει μὴ οὖσι θεοῖς | 1 | The phrase, **those, by nature, not being gods** refers to the beings which the Galatians served when they were pagans and were considered by them to be gods, but they were not really gods. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “false gods who were not really gods at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 529 | 4:9 | i5p3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 530 | 4:9 | kv61 | γνόντες & γνωσθέντες | 1 | Make sure that you translate the words **know** and **known** with the same type of expression as you used to translate the word “known” in [4:8](../04/08.md). The phrase “not having known God” in [4:8](../04/08.md) and the phrases **know God** and **known by God** in this verse are all referring to intimate personal knowledge that comes from a relationship with someone and not merely to being acquainted with someone or familiar with facts pertaining to them. | ||
| 531 | 4:9 | cfka | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γνωσθέντες ὑπὸ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “now that God came to know you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 532 | 4:9 | wkt9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | πῶς ἐπιστρέφετε πάλιν ἐπὶ τὰ ἀσθενῆ καὶ πτωχὰ στοιχεῖα | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 533 | 4:9 | b8ue | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐπιστρέφετε | 1 | Here, **turning** means to “to return.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “are you returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 534 | 4:9 | n5ie | τὰ ἀσθενῆ καὶ πτωχὰ στοιχεῖα | 1 | See how you decided to translate the phrase **elemental principles** in [Galatians 4:3](../04/03.md). | ||
| 535 | 4:9 | w28k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | οἷς πάλιν ἄνωθεν δουλεύειν θέλετε | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to rebuke the Galatian believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 536 | 4:9 | s77e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἷς πάλιν ἄνωθεν δουλεύειν θέλετε | 1 | Here, **to be enslaved** is a metaphor for being obligated to obey certain rules and regulations. If your readers would not understand what being **enslaved** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. See how you chose to translate the word **enslaved** in [4:8](../04/08.md) where it is also used with a metaphorical use. Alternate translation: “to which once more you want to act like a slave who must obey his master” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 537 | 4:10 | j8k2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | παρατηρεῖσθε | 1 | Here, the word **observe** refers to observing something for religious purposes in order to gain God’s favor and approval. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You observe for religious purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 538 | 4:10 | fd09 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | παρατηρεῖσθε | 1 | The word **You** is plural here and refers to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 539 | 4:10 | w7d5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἡμέρας & καὶ μῆνας, καὶ καιροὺς, καὶ ἐνιαυτούς | 1 | Paul is describing the different Jewish celebrations and religious observances (required in the law of Moses) by associating them with the times when they took place. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish Sabbath days and other days prescribed in the law of Moses. You also observe the monthly Jewish celebrations and annual Jewish festivals as well the Jewish sacred years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 540 | 4:11 | ct4e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | φοβοῦμαι | 1 | Here, the phrase **I am afraid** means “I am concerned about.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 541 | 4:11 | yytt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμᾶς & ὑμᾶς | 1 | Both occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 542 | 4:11 | chxa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | μή πως εἰκῇ κεκοπίακα εἰς ὑμᾶς | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “that I have possibly labored among you for nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) | |
| 543 | 4:11 | alfd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κεκοπίακα | 1 | Here, the word **labored** refers to Paul’s work of teaching the Galatians the truths of the Christian faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have labored in teaching and preaching” or “I have taught the truths of the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 544 | 4:11 | bsv1 | εἰκῇ | 1 | Alternate translation: “without results” or “to no avail” or “purposelessly” | ||
| 545 | 4:12 | mad2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | οἴδατε & ὑμῖν | 1 | In this verse both occurrences of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Galatian believers. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 546 | 4:12 | p9gn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 547 | 4:12 | gteu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | γίνεσθε ὡς ἐγώ, ὅτι κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς | 1 | Here, Paul is referring to obeying the rules and regulations prescribed in the law of Moses. He is asking the Galatians to become like himself by not acting as if the law of Moses has authority over his life, because he originally became as they were, when they did not seek to conduct their lives according to the rules prescribed in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 548 | 4:12 | b4w2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γίνεσθε ὡς ἐγώ, ὅτι κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I became as you, you also should become as I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 549 | 4:12 | cg8i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | κἀγὼ ὡς ὑμεῖς | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Here, the implied words are **became** and **are**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context as modeled by the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 550 | 4:12 | n3wf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes | οὐδέν με ἠδικήσατε | 1 | Here. Paul expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “You treated me well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) | |
| 551 | 4:13 | ytex | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background | δὲ | 1 | Paul is using the word **Now** to introduce background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])m | |
| 552 | 4:13 | a22l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | δι’ ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς, εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν | 1 | Here, Paul states that it was a physical sickness that previously caused him to proclaim the gospel to Galatians. This could mean that (1) Paul was already in Galatia and a physical sickness caused Paul to stay in Galatia longer and recover and because of this delay he had time and opportunity to proclaim the gospel to the Galatians (2) because of a physical sickness Paul went to Galatia to recover from his sickness and while there he proclaimed the gospel to the Galatians. Because Paul does not explicitly state which of these two scenarios provided the opportunity for him to preach the gospel, but rather simply focuses on the sickness, you should not further explain what Paul says here about his sickness but rather use a general expression as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 553 | 4:13 | ho2d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | δι’ | 1 | Here, Paul is using the phrase **because** to introduce the reason that he **proclaimed the gospel** to the Galatians **previously**, which was **because** he had to stay in Galatia because of a physical sickness. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-result clause. (Here, the reason is **a weakness of the flesh** and the result is that Paul **proclaimed the gospel to** the Galatians). Alternate translation: “on account of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 554 | 4:13 | qstf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “weak”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 555 | 4:13 | iuz9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase **the flesh** in [2:20](../02/20.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the body” or “of my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 556 | 4:14 | tk1l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | τὸν πειρασμὸν ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου | 1 | The phrase **your trial in my flesh** means that Paul had some physical problem or malady that either itself caused difficulty (a **trial**) for the Galatians or caused difficulty (a **trial**) for them because they had to care for or help him as a result of his difficulty. Because Paul does not specify the specifics of how his physical malady created a **trial** for the Galatians, it is best to translate this phrase with a general phrase which leaves room for either possibility as modeled by the ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 557 | 4:14 | v9xa | οὐκ ἐξουθενήσατε | 1 | Alternate translation: “you did not scorn” or “you did not hate” | ||
| 558 | 4:14 | h3vm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸν πειρασμὸν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trial**, you could express the same idea some other way that would be natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 559 | 4:14 | qz18 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | σαρκί | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **flesh**, which is one part of his body, to refer to his entire body. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase **the flesh** in [2:20](../02/20.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 560 | 4:14 | l244 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὡς ἄγγελον Θεοῦ | 1 | The phrase **as an angel of God** means “as if I were an angel of God.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as if I were an angel of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 561 | 4:14 | gbhr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὡς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν | 1 | The phrase **as Christ Jesus** means “as you would welcome Christ Jesus.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as you would welcome Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 562 | 4:15 | ard2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ποῦ οὖν ὁ μακαρισμὸς ὑμῶν | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to show the Galatian believers his disappointment and in order to cause them to think about what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 563 | 4:15 | kcer | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | μακαρισμὸς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 564 | 4:15 | paah | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces information which proves how the Galatians had previously felt about Paul. Use a natural form in your language for introducing this material. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 565 | 4:15 | ogmb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo | εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν ἐξορύξαντες, ἐδώκατέ μοι | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers remember the way that they formerly felt and thought about Paul. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “if it were possible that you could have torn out your eyes and then given the to me, you would have done so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) | |
| 566 | 4:15 | o5tg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | εἰ δυνατὸν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if it were possible for you to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 567 | 4:15 | wyyt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν ἐξορύξαντες, ἐδώκατέ μοι | 1 | The phrase **having torn out your eyes, you would have given them to me** could: (1) be an idiom indicating the great love and devotion which the Galatians formerly had for Paul. In Paul’s time the eyes were considered a person’s most precious possession so if it were possible for a person to take out their eyes and give them to another person this would be a sign of extreme devotion and love towards the person to whom they were given. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you formerly loved me very much and would have given me your most valued possessions to show me your love” (2) indicate that Paul had some type of disease and by Paul saying this here he is indicating the great concern which the Galatians had formerly shown for him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 568 | 4:16 | i73s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | Paul is using the phrase **So then** to introduce a reason-result clause in which **speaking truth** to the Galatians is the reason, and them acting as if Paul were their **enemy** is the result. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason-result clause. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Therefore, as a result of” or “So then, as a result of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 569 | 4:16 | zznv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἐχθρὸς ὑμῶν γέγονα, ἀληθεύων ὑμῖν | 1 | The phrase **speaking truth to you, have I become your enemy** could be: (1) a rhetorical question in which Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to show the Galatian believers his disappointment with them and in order to cause them to think about what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (2) a statement in which Paul is telling the Galatians that based on the way they are acting it seems as if he has now become their enemy by telling them the truth. Alternate translation: “as a result of my speaking the truth to you, you are acting as if I have become your enemy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 570 | 4:16 | mhkl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀληθεύων ὑμῖν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “true”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “by telling you things that are true” or Alternate translation: “because I have told you what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 571 | 4:17 | dxtd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζηλοῦσιν & θέλουσιν | 1 | In this verse, the pronouns **They** and **they** both refer to the false teachers who were Judaizers and were teaching the Galatians false things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The false teachers are zealous … these false teachers desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 572 | 4:17 | lt7y | οὐ καλῶς | 1 | Alternate translation: “but not in a good way” or “but not in a way that is right” or “but their intentions are not good” | ||
| 573 | 4:17 | rulh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Here, the word **but** is introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “rather” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 574 | 4:17 | s9kn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκκλεῖσαι ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here, the the phrase **to separate you** refers to separating the Galatian believers from Paul and probably also not only from Paul but also from his ministry partners because they all taught a gospel message that was different from what the false teachers were teaching to the Galatian believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly who Paul is saying that the false teachers are trying to separate the Galatian believers from as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “to separate you from us” or “to shut you out from us” or “to make you stop being loyal to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 575 | 4:17 | wrvk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is introducing the purpose for which the false teachers desired **to separate** the Galatian believers from Paul and his ministry partners. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 576 | 4:17 | iv1d | αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε | 1 | Alternate translation: “you would be devoted to them” or “you would be attached to them”. | ||
| 577 | 4:18 | hjp6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | The word **But** could: (1) be introducing a contrast. Use a natural form for introducing a contrast. (2) be introducing additional comments that Paul wants to make regarding what he has just finished saying prior to this verse. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 578 | 4:18 | m5m2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καλῷ | 1 | Here, the word **good** refers to “good things.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “good things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 579 | 4:19 | u3eb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τέκνα μου | 1 | Paul speaks of the Galatian believers as if they were his **children** and he was their mother. Paul calls the Galatian believers his **children** because they believed in Jesus as a result of Paul proclaiming the gospel to them. The Galatian believers experienced their spiritual birth as a result of Paul’s work of proclaiming the gospel to them, so he was their spiritual mother and they were his spiritual children. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You who believed the message about Jesus that I proclaimed to you” or “My spiritual children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 580 | 4:19 | yf9e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πάλιν ὠδίνω | 1 | Paul speaks of his work of seeking to help the Galatians grow in spiritual maturity, and the mental and physical suffering he endured as a result of this work, as if it were the **labor** that a mother endures when giving birth to a child. If it would be helpful to your readers you could use a simile as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “I am again in anguish as though I am a woman giving birth” or “it is as if I am in labor again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 581 | 4:19 | u9fp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | The phrase **Christ would be formed in you** could be: (1) synecdoche in which case Paul is using the word **Christ** to refer to being a mature follower of Christ who is mature in their thinking and whose actions resemble Christ’s actions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Christ’s nature becomes fully developed in you” or “you become a mature follower of Christ” or “you resemble Christ in your actions and in your thinking” (2) be a metaphor in which case Paul is describing the Galatian believers as if they were mothers and Christ was being formed inside them. Alternate translation: “Christ's nature becomes developed in you completely and wholeheartedly as a child becomes developed in his mother's womb” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 582 | 4:19 | k4fo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forms Christ in you” or “God would form Christ in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 583 | 4:20 | csin | δὲ | 1 | Alternate translation: “and” | ||
| 584 | 4:20 | ucgi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἤθελον & παρεῖναι πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἄρτι, καὶ ἀλλάξαι τὴν φωνήν μου, ὅτι ἀποροῦμαι ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I am perplexed about you, I am desiring to be present with you now and to change my tone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 585 | 4:20 | j8on | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀλλάξαι τὴν φωνήν μου | 1 | The phrase **change my tone** refers to Paul “changing the manner of his communication” towards the Galatians from being stern and rebuking to being more affectionate. Paul loved the Galatian believers, however, because of the serious nature of the false teaching which the Galatians were being tempted to accept, combined with Paul’s physical distance from the Galatians, he felt that he needed to write to them and firmly and sternly correct their false thinking with the hope that they would not believe or follow false teaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what the phrase **change my tone** means here. Alternate translation: “to speak in a different manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 586 | 4:21 | z1um | λέγετέ μοι | 1 | Alternate translation: “I want to ask a question” or “I want to tell you something” | ||
| 587 | 4:21 | sf5v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | οἱ | 1 | Here, the word **you** is plural. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 588 | 4:21 | y3km | θέλοντες | 1 | See how you translated the word **desiring** in [4:20](../04/20.md). | ||
| 589 | 4:21 | ysq4 | ὑπὸ νόμον | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **under the law** in [3:23](../03/23.md). Paul uses this phrase with the same meaning in [3:23](../03/23.md), [4:4](../04/04.md), and [4:5](../04/05.md). | ||
| 590 | 4:21 | u6fs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τὸν νόμον οὐκ ἀκούετε | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in order to cause the Galatian believers to think about and reflect on what he is going to say next. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “you need to learn what the law really says” or “let me tell you what the law really says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 591 | 4:21 | kw9j | τὸν νόμον οὐκ ἀκούετε | 1 | Alternate translation: “do you not comprehend what the law is teaching” or “do you not understand what the law is actually teaching” | ||
| 592 | 4:22 | fkbv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | γέγραπται | 1 | Here, Paul uses **it is written** to mean that it is written in the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it has been written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 593 | 4:22 | gthm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, “Moses” did it. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” or “Moses wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 594 | 4:22 | ljse | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | Ἀβραὰμ δύο υἱοὺς ἔσχεν; ἕνα ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης, καὶ ἕνα ἐκ τῆς ἐλευθέρας | 1 | In this verse and in all of [4:23](../04/23.md) Paul is summarizing a story from the book of Genesis and is not directly quoting Scripture so you should not use quotation marks or anything else that might cause your readers to think that Paul is directly quoting Scripture here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) | |
| 595 | 4:22 | wbg3 | ἕνα ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης, καὶ ἕνα ἐκ τῆς ἐλευθέρας | 1 | Alternate translation: “one son from the slave girl and one son from the free woman” | ||
| 596 | 4:23 | djsd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἀλλ’ | 1 | Here, Paul is using the word **And** to introduce additional information regarding the two sons mentioned in [4:22](../04/22.md). In the remainder of this verse Paul contrasts the way in which the two sons were born. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 597 | 4:23 | bthj | παιδίσκης & ἐλευθέρας | 1 | See how you translated **slave girl** and **free woman** in [4:22](../04/22.md). | ||
| 598 | 4:23 | s2pc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | Here, the phrase **according to the flesh** means that Ishmael was born in the natural way by which all children are born, without God intervening and performing a miracle. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the natural way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 599 | 4:23 | wjvp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. It is introducing a contrast between Ishmael, **the one** who **was born from the slave girl according to the flesh** and Isaac, who was born **from the free woman, through promise**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 600 | 4:23 | qnl9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δι’ ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | Here, the phrase **through promise** means “through God’s promise to Abraham” and refers to God supernaturally intervening and enabling Abraham’s wife Sarah (**the free woman**) to become pregnant in order to fulfill his **promise** to Abraham. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “through God’s promise to Abraham” or “was conceived supernaturally as a result of what God had promised Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 601 | 4:23 | e2i9 | ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 602 | 4:24 | jfuz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἅτινά | 1 | **These things** refers to the **things** Paul has just described in [4:22-23](../04/22.md) regarding Abraham, his two sons, and Hagar and Sarah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These events I have just described to you” or “These things I have just described to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 603 | 4:24 | rilp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἅτινά ἐστιν ἀλληγορούμενα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “he” is doing it. Alternate translation: “I am speaking of these things allegorically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 604 | 4:24 | k5qu | ἅτινά ἐστιν ἀλληγορούμενα | 1 | An **allegory** is a story in which things within the story are interpreted as representing something else. Here, the things in the story are meant to be interpreted as representing spiritual truths and realities. In this allegory, the two women referred to in [4:22](../04/22.md) represent two different covenants. If your language has a word or phrase to describe what an **allegory** is you can use that here. Alternately, if it would help your readers, you can describe what an allegory is in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am speaking of these things in order to teach you a spiritual truth” or “I am speaking of these things in order to use them as an analogy so that I can teach you an important truth” | ||
| 605 | 4:24 | b120 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | αὗται | 1 | Here, the word **they** refers to Sarah and Hagar. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “these women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 606 | 4:24 | mfa9 | διαθῆκαι | 1 | See how you translated the word “covenant” in [3:15](../03/15.md). | ||
| 607 | 4:24 | mt7j | μία | 1 | The word **One** here could refer to: (1) the covenant which God made at Mount Sinai which resulted in spiritual slavery to the law. Alternate translation: “One covenant” (2) Hagar in which case Paul means that she corresponds to Mount Sinai (See [4:25](../04/25.md)) and gave birth to children destined for slavery. Alternate translation: “One woman” | ||
| 608 | 4:24 | u4hr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | Ὄρους Σινά | 1 | Paul uses **Mount Sinai** to refer to the covenant with the laws that Moses gave to the Israelites there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “Mount Sinai, where Moses received the law and gave it to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 609 | 4:24 | aani | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς δουλείαν γεννῶσα | 1 | Paul speaks of the law of Moses “producing” or “resulting in” something as if the process of “producing” were **giving birth**. Paul speaks of the “spiritual bondage” of being under the law of Moses as if it were **slavery**. Paul is saying the the law of Moses “produces spiritual slavery.” If your readers would not understand what **giving birth** or **slavery** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and produces spiritual slavery” or “and results in spiritual slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 610 | 4:24 | e3rc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δουλείαν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slavery**, you could express the same idea with a concrete noun such as “slave”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 611 | 4:25 | u1cc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ&Ἁγὰρ Σινά Ὄρος ἐστὶν | 1 | **Hagar is Mount Sinai** means that “Hagar symbolizes Mount Sinai.” Here, Paul begin to explain the meaning of the allegory which he began in [4:22](../04/22.md). If it would help your readers you can indicate explicitly what the phrase **Hagar is Mount Sinai** means here as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “Hagar represents Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 612 | 4:25 | klcv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | τὸ&Ἁγὰρ Σινά Ὄρος ἐστὶν ἐν τῇ Ἀραβίᾳ | 1 | Paul uses **Mount Sinai in Arabia** to refer to the covenant with the laws that Moses gave to the Israelites there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “Hagar resembles Mount Sinai in Arabia, where Moses received the law and gave it to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) | |
| 613 | 4:25 | azzt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | συνστοιχεῖ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. The words that Paul leaves out could be: (1) Hagar. Alternate translation: “Hagar corresponds” (2) Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “Mount Sinai corresponds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 614 | 4:25 | xvhr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | νῦν Ἰερουσαλήμ, δουλεύει γὰρ | 1 | Paul is describing the religion of Judaism (which emphasized obeying the law of Moses) by association with the city of Jerusalem, which was the center of this religion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “religion of Judaism, for all who follow this religion are in slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 615 | 4:25 | bonn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | δουλεύει γὰρ μετὰ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς | 1 | Paul speaks of the religion of Judaism, with its emphasis on obeying the law of Moses, as being **in slavery**. Here, Paul uses the word **slavery** to refer to the ”spiritual bondage“ that seeking to obey the religious system based on the law of Moses creates for those who seek to obey it as a means of meriting God’s approval. Here, **slavery** refers to “spiritual bondage” and **children** refers to those people who seek to obey the law of Moses as a means of meriting God’s approval. If your readers would not understand what **slavery** and **children** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for Jerusalem represents the religious system of Judaism, which results in spiritual bondage for all those who practice it” or “for Jerusalem represents the religious system based on the laws of Moses, which results in spiritual bondage for all those who seek to be righteous before God by practicing them”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 616 | 4:25 | frft | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | δουλεύει&μετὰ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς | 1 | Here, Paul refers to the city of **Jerusalem** as though it were a woman (**she** and **her**) who could be **in slavery** and have **children**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem represents the religious system of Judaism, which results in spiritual bondage for all those practice it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 617 | 4:25 | flc8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δουλεύει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slavery**, you could express the same idea with a concrete noun such as “slave”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 618 | 4:26 | busv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast between “the present Jerusalem” mentioned in [4:25](../04/25.md) and **the Jerusalem above** in this verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 619 | 4:26 | qsz6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | ἡ&ἄνω Ἰερουσαλὴμ | 1 | The phrase **the Jerusalem above** refers to the heavenly city of God which is comprised of all those who trust Jesus to save them from their sins. If your readers would not understand what **the Jerusalem above** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the heavenly Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 620 | 4:26 | tdz1 | rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἄνω | 1 | Paul is describing what is “heavenly” (what belongs to or comes from heaven) by association with the word **above**, which his readers would have understood to mean “heavenly.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 621 | 4:26 | qpxq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐλευθέρα | 1 | Here, the word **free** refers to spiritual freedom which consists of freedom from the law of Moses and being freed from the power and condemnation of sin in order to worship God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 622 | 4:26 | iwg1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἥτις ἐστὶν μήτηρ ἡμῶν | 1 | Paul uses the word **mother** to refer to belonging to a place as a citizen of that place. If your readers would not understand what **mother** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 623 | 4:26 | c4qu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | μήτηρ ἡμῶν | 1 | Paul speaks of **the Jerusalem above** as if it was were a **mother**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 624 | 4:26 | ijkp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν | 1 | When Paul says **our**, he is speaking of all believers in Jesus, which would include himself and the Galatian believers, so **our** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 625 | 4:27 | kfc6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γάρ | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **For** to indicate that he is introducing material which supports what he said in [4:26](../04/26.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing information which supports a prior claim. (See:[[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 626 | 4:27 | jt53 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | γέγραπται | 1 | Here, Paul uses the phrase **it is written** to indicate that what follows is a quotation from the Old Testament Scriptures. Paul assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 627 | 4:27 | ummm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the prophet “Isaiah” did it. Alternate translation: “Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 628 | 4:27 | jql2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | εὐφράνθητι, στεῖρα, ἡ οὐ τίκτουσα, ῥῆξον καὶ βόησον, ἡ οὐκ ὠδίνουσα, ὅτι πολλὰ τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐρήμου μᾶλλον, ἢ τῆς ἐχούσης τὸν ἄνδρα | 1 | This is a quotation from Isaiah 54:1. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 629 | 4:27 | y6x4 | 0 | ||||
| 630 | 4:27 | scqa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὅτι | 1 | The word **because** is introducing the reason to **Rejoice**. Use a natural form for introducing a reason to do something. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 631 | 4:28 | jfx1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δέ | 1 | Here, Paul uses the word **Now** to indicate that what he writes next is connected to what he wrote immediately before this and that he is continuing his line of thought. Use a natural form in your language to indicate that what follows is in continuity with what precedes it. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 632 | 4:28 | oyo4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile | ὑμεῖς&ἀδελφοί, κατὰ Ἰσαὰκ, ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα ἐστέ | 1 | The point of this comparison is that the Galatian believers (who are referred to as **brothers**) are **like Isaac** because both **Isaac** and the Galatians are **children of promise**, meaning that they both owe their birth to God’s supernatural working. Isaac’s physical birth came about as a result of God’s supernatural intervention, and the Galatian believers spiritual birth came about as a result of God’s supernatural intervention. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers, you are similar to Isaac in that God miraculously intervened for both you and him in order to fulfill his promise to Abraham” or “my fellow believers, you are similar to Isaac because God did something miraculous for both you and him in order to fulfill what he promised to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) | |
| 633 | 4:28 | p45d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμεῖς | 1 | Here, the pronoun **you** is plural. Your language may require you to mark such forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 634 | 4:28 | ad75 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 635 | 4:28 | ct63 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα | 1 | Here, **children** could be a metaphor which means that the Galatian believers are: (1) “God’s spiritual descendants.” If it would help your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual descendants” or “God’s children” (2) “Abraham’s spiritual descendants.” If it would help your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s spiritual descendants” or “Abraham’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 636 | 4:28 | u3dr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐπαγγελίας τέκνα | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the source of these **children**. He means that the **children** are the **children** or “descendants” which God promised to supernaturally give to Abraham and therefore they are **children** whose source derives from God fulfillment of his **promise** to Abraham. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify the relationship for your readers. Alternate translation: “children of God’s promise” or “children born from promise” or “children of God’s promise to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 637 | 4:28 | u9t0 | ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | See how you translated the word **promise** in [3:14](../03/14.md). | ||
| 638 | 4:29 | on63 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἀλλ’ | 1 | Here, the word **But** could be: (1) introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast as modeled by the ULT. (2) indicating a transition. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 639 | 4:29 | vmec | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὥσπερ | 1 | Here, the word **just as** introduces a comparison. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a comparison. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 640 | 4:29 | eky8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὁ | 1 | Here, the phrase **the one** refers to Abraham’s son Ishmael. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 641 | 4:29 | c9lf | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | See how you translated the phrase **according to flesh** in [4:23](../04/23.md) where it is used with the same meaning. | ||
| 642 | 4:29 | ppp0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν | 1 | Here, the phrase **the one** refers to Abraham’s son Isaac. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 643 | 4:29 | ued8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | κατὰ Πνεῦμα | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having been born according to Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 644 | 4:29 | gt1e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ Πνεῦμα | 1 | Here, **according to Spirit** means that Isaac’s birth came about because the Holy Spirit worked in a supernatural way in order to make it happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having been born because of the supernatural working of the Spirit” or “having been born by the miraculous working of the Spirit” or “having been born because of the powerful working of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 645 | 4:29 | jff1 | Πνεῦμα | 1 | The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Make sure that you translate the word **Spirit** with the same word that you used to translate “Spirit” in [3:2](../03/02.md) where it is also referring to the Holy Spirit. | ||
| 646 | 4:29 | saqx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | οὕτως καὶ | 1 | The phrase **so it is also** introduces . Use a natural way in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 647 | 4:30 | ca1m | ἀλλὰ | 1 | |||
| 648 | 4:30 | a2xo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form to get the Galatian believers to think about the scripture verse he cites next. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 649 | 4:30 | klbo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | λέγει ἡ Γραφή | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of the **scripture** passage he is quoting from Genesis as though it were a were a person who could speak . If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “does Moses say in the scripture” or “does Moses write in the scripture”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 650 | 4:30 | kg1j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἔκβαλε τὴν παιδίσκην καὶ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτῆς; οὐ γὰρ μὴ κληρονομήσει ὁ υἱὸς τῆς παιδίσκης, μετὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τῆς ἐλευθέρας | 1 | This is a quotation from Genesis. Use a natural way of indicating that something is a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 651 | 4:30 | x9d7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἔκβαλε | 1 | Here, **Cast out** means to “send away.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 652 | 4:30 | upqy | παιδίσκην&παιδίσκης&ἐλευθέρας | 1 | See how you translated the phrases **slave girl** and **free woman** in [4:22](../04/22.md). | ||
| 653 | 4:30 | mjj5 | κληρονομήσει | 1 | See how you translated the similar word “inheritance” in [3:18](../03/18.md). | ||
| 654 | 4:30 | imto | οὐ&μὴ | 1 | The phrase **certainly not** is a strong negation used to emphatically negate the idea that follows it. Use a form in your language to emphatically negate an idea. | ||
| 655 | 4:31 | g74v | διό | 1 | |||
| 656 | 4:31 | sy8u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the word **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 657 | 4:31 | pesk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἐσμὲν | 1 | ||
| 658 | 4:31 | iz3b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τέκνα | 1 | Paul speaks of “spiritual descendants” as if they were **children**. If your readers would not understand what **children** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way as modeled by the UST. See how you translated the word **children** in [4:28](../04/28.md) where it is also used to mean “spiritual descendants.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 659 | 4:31 | ily3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 660 | 5:intro | bcg3 | 0 | # Galatians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. In this chapter Paul declares repeatedly that Christ has freed believers from being obligated to obey the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Fruit of the Spirit\n\nThe phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. The word “fruit” is singular and refers to the nine qualities listed in [5:22–23](../05/22.md) to show that they are a united cluster of qualities that are manifested in each believer. Translators should keep the singular form for “fruit” if possible. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]]) | |||
| 661 | 5:1 | kuu9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν | 1 | **For freedom Christ set us free** implies that Christ **set** believers **free** from being required to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Christ has set us free from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 662 | 5:1 | dt67 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the purpose for which Christ freed believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose. Alternate translation: “For the purpose of freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 663 | 5:1 | hh1k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ&δουλείας | 1 | See how you translated **freedom** in [2:4](../02/04.md) and **slavery** in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 664 | 5:1 | wfny | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμᾶς | 1 | When Paul says **us** here, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 665 | 5:1 | j679 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | στήκετε | 1 | **Stand firm** here refers to someone remaining steadfast in what one believes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be unmoved” or “Remain strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 666 | 5:1 | eamw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ πάλιν&ἐνέχεσθε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not again subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 667 | 5:1 | ovu1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μὴ πάλιν ζυγῷ δουλείας ἐνέχεσθε | 1 | Here Paul speaks of someone being obligated to obey the laws God gave the Jews as if that person were **subjected to a yoke of slavery.** If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “do not go back to being obligated to obey the law” or “do not be subjected to the law like one who is under a yoke of slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 668 | 5:1 | f969 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ζυγῷ δουλείας | 1 | James is using the possessive form to describe a **yoke** that is **slavery**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a yoke, that is, slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 669 | 5:2 | bki6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἴδε | 1 | Paul uses the term **Behold** to focus his audience’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 670 | 5:2 | lrsx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐὰν περιτέμνησθε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone circumcises you” or “if you receive circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 671 | 5:2 | vk9o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Χριστὸς ὑμᾶς οὐδὲν ὠφελήσει. | 1 | In this clause Paul means that if a person is circumcised in order to receive salvation, then what Christ has done to provide salvation for them will not help them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Christ has done will not benefit you at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 672 | 5:3 | h4q5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | περιτεμνομένῳ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who has someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 673 | 5:3 | iqy8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅλον τὸν νόμον ποιῆσαι | 1 | Paul implies that a **circumcised** man must obey **the whole law** in order to be righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to do the whole law to become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 674 | 5:3 | cwlk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | ὅλον τὸν νόμον | 1 | Here, **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See how **law** is translated in [2:16](../02/16.md) and [Romans 2:12](../../rom/02/12.md). Alternate translation: “all of God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 675 | 5:4 | v01q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | κατηργήθητε ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ, οἵτινες ἐν νόμῳ δικαιοῦσθε | 1 | **You** here refers to **whoever is being justified by the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “You who are being justified by the law were cut off from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 676 | 5:4 | wsls | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κατηργήθητε&δικαιοῦσθε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You cut yourselves off … is justifying oneself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 677 | 5:4 | h4yu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κατηργήθητε ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, **cut off** refers to being separated from Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have ended your relationship with Christ” or “You are separated from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 678 | 5:4 | ipf7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οἵτινες ἐν νόμῳ δικαιοῦσθε | 1 | Paul implies that these people were trying to be **justified by** obeying **the law,** which is impossible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever attempts to be justified by obeying the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 679 | 5:4 | ygbj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμῳ | 1 | See how you translated **law** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 680 | 5:4 | k6xe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῆς χάριτος ἐξεπέσατε | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were something that a person could fall away from. He means that people who are trying to save themselves by obeying the law do not receive God’s **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you have rejected the grace of God” or “God will no longer be gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 681 | 5:5 | nabj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul stated in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 682 | 5:5 | kvpn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Πνεύματι | 1 | Here and throughout this chapter, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy **Spirit**. See how you translated the same use of **Spirit** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 683 | 5:5 | vvk6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως&ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **hope**, and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md) and **righteousness** in [2:21](../02/21.md). Alternate translation: “by trusting … what is hopeful of what it righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 684 | 5:5 | pdm1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμεῖς | 1 | Here, **we** refers to Paul and those who trust in Christ instead of the law, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 685 | 5:5 | qg9m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἡμεῖς&ἐκ πίστεως ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης ἀπεκδεχόμεθα | 1 | This could mean: (1) **we eagerly wait** **by faith**. Alternate translation: “we eagerly wait by faith for the hope of righteousness” (2) **righteousness** is **by faith**. Alternate translation: “we eagerly wait for the hope of righteousness by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 686 | 5:5 | xtqp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης | 1 | This could mean: (1) people **hope** for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the hope for righteousness” (2) **the hope** is **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the hope, that is, righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 687 | 5:6 | rn0r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is a reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 688 | 5:6 | bhdg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν&Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in [3:26](../03/26.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 689 | 5:6 | y2ww | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | περιτομή&ἀκροβυστία&πίστις&ἀγάπης | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision**, **uncircumcision**, **faith**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated **faith** in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “being circumcised … not being circumcised … trusting … loving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 690 | 5:6 | qp6b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | οὔτε περιτομή τι ἰσχύει, οὔτε ἀκροβυστία | 1 | Here, **anything** refers to being important to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither circumcision nor uncircumcision is capable of being important to God” or “neither circumcision nor uncircumcision matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 691 | 5:6 | bw6b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | πίστις δι’ ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “faith working through love is capable of something” or “faith working through love matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 692 | 5:7 | jj48 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐτρέχετε καλῶς | 1 | Here Paul refers to becoming more spiritually mature as if someone were **running** a race. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You were making excellent progress in your faith” or “you were doing so well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 693 | 5:7 | ntd5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς ὑμᾶς ἐνέκοψεν, ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not let have let someone hinder you, not to be persuaded by truth!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 694 | 5:7 | w0iq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι | 1 | This clause provides the expected result of what Paul said in the previous clause. Use a natural form for indicating a result. Alternate translation: “which is resulting in you not being persuaded by truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 695 | 5:7 | bmy4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the truth is not persuading you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 696 | 5:7 | vuf8 | ἀληθείᾳ μὴ πείθεσθαι | 1 | The phrase translated as **not to be persuaded by truth** could also be translated as “not to obey the truth.” | ||
| 697 | 5:7 | krep | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀληθείᾳ | 1 | See how you translated **truth** in [2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 698 | 5:8 | sx6u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ πεισμονὴ | 1 | Here, **persuasion** refers to some Galatians being persuaded to obey the laws God gave the Jews instead of trusting in Jesus for salvation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You being persuaded to stop trusting in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 699 | 5:8 | bqxm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here, **the one calling you** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who is calling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 700 | 5:9 | q926 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs | μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ | 1 | Here Paul quotes or creates a proverb, which is a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb gives a comparison: Just as a small amount of **leaven** **leavens** a whole **lump** of dough, so a small amount of false teaching can deceive many people in a church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “It has been said that a little leaven causes a whole lump of dough to be leavened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) | |
| 701 | 5:9 | xds5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ | 1 | The word **leaven** refers to a substance that causes fermentation and expansion within a batch of dough or batter. Here, **leavens** refers to the fermentation process and **lump** refers to the batch of dough. If your readers would not be familiar with **leaven**, you could use the name of a substance that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “A little yeast causes all of the batch of dough to swell up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 702 | 5:10 | usoc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | Here, **in the Lord** indicates the basis or cause for which Paul was **confident in** the Galatian believers, and **the Lord** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar expression “in Christ” in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of us being in union with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 703 | 5:10 | enp1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐδὲν ἄλλο φρονήσετε | 1 | Here, **nothing otherwise** refers to **nothing** other than what Paul has told his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will think nothing other than what I am telling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 704 | 5:10 | jc72 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ὁ&ταράσσων ὑμᾶς&ὅστις ἐὰν ᾖ | 1 | Jesus is speaking of several people who were **troubling** the Galatian believers, not just one particular man. Paul states in [1:7](../01/07.md) that there were several false teachers causing trouble. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “those troubling you … whoever they may be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) | |
| 705 | 5:10 | llh5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | βαστάσει τὸ κρίμα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 706 | 5:11 | nv5x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 707 | 5:11 | d4mm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo | ἐγὼ&εἰ περιτομὴν ἔτι κηρύσσω, τί ἔτι διώκομαι | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help emphasize that he does not **proclaim circumcision**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “were I still proclaiming circumcision, then why am I still being persecuted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) | |
| 708 | 5:11 | gaq4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | περιτομὴν&κηρύσσω | 1 | Here, **proclaim circumcision** refers to telling people that they must be circumcised in order to be saved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “proclaim the need to be circumcised” or “proclaim that everyone must be circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 709 | 5:11 | wgui | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | περιτομὴν | 1 | See how you translated **circumcision** in [verse 6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 710 | 5:11 | hgo8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί ἔτι διώκομαι? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I would not still be persecuted!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 711 | 5:11 | y3ug | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τί ἔτι διώκομαι&κατήργηται τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why are people still persecuting me … I would have removed the stumbling block of the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 712 | 5:11 | l5tk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἄρα κατήργηται τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ | 1 | This sentence gives both the result of proclaiming **circumcision** and the reason why someone who proclaimed **circumcision** would not be **persecuted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would not be persecuted because proclaiming circumcision would remove the stumbling block of the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 713 | 5:11 | z2hj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ σκάνδαλον τοῦ σταυροῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the stumbling block** that is **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the stumbling block, that is, the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 714 | 5:11 | arj5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ σκάνδαλον | 1 | Here, **stumbling block** refers to something that offends people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 715 | 5:11 | nipj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τοῦ σταυροῦ | 1 | Here, **the cross** refers to Christ’s sacrificial death on the cross, which was a very offensive way to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of what Jesus did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 716 | 5:12 | e7c2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ὄφελον καὶ ἀποκόψονται, οἱ ἀναστατοῦντες ὑμᾶς | 1 | If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “O how I wish that the ones disturbing you would even castrate themselves!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) | |
| 717 | 5:12 | sfl2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καὶ ἀποκόψονται | 1 | This could mean: (1) Paul wished that the false teachers who wanted to circumcise the Galatian believers would cut off their male organs, as stated literally in the ULT. (2) Paul wished that the false teachers would leave the Christian community. Alternate translation: “will even remove themselves from among you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 718 | 5:13 | y1g7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here could indicate: (1) Paul is transitioning back to the topic he introduced in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (2) the reason for the harsh words Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I wish they would do so because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 719 | 5:13 | ekb2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὑμεῖς&ἐπ’ ἐλευθερίᾳ ἐκλήθητε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 720 | 5:13 | w433 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐλευθερίᾳ&τὴν ἐλευθερίαν | 1 | Here, **freedom** implies that Christ sets believers free from being required to obey the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar expression in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “freedom from the law … that freedom from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 721 | 5:13 | dgaf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐλευθερίᾳ&ἐλευθερίαν | 1 | See how you translated **freedom** in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 722 | 5:13 | yp6r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 723 | 5:13 | b62s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἀφορμὴν τῇ σαρκί | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who could take advantage of **an opportunity**. He is referring to believers thinking they can sin because they do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews . If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an opportunity to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]). | |
| 724 | 5:13 | viv6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῇ σαρκί | 1 | Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for your sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 725 | 5:13 | ierd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τῆς ἀγάπης | 1 | Here, **through** indicates the means by which believers should **serve one another**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 726 | 5:13 | iki8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ἀγάπης | 1 | See how you translated **love** in [verse 6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 727 | 5:14 | cu9y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul’s readers should obey the command he gave in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “You must do this for one another because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 728 | 5:14 | ct8i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ&πᾶς νόμος ἐν ἑνὶ λόγῳ πεπλήρωται | 1 | This could mean: (1) this **one command** sums up **all the law**. Alternate translation: “all the law is summed up in just one command” (2) someone who obeys this **one command** obeys **all the law**. Alternate translation: “by obeying one commandment, you obey the whole law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 729 | 5:14 | eaeo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὁ&πᾶς νόμος ἐν ἑνὶ λόγῳ πεπλήρωται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “one command has fulfilled all the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 730 | 5:14 | pda2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | ὁ&νόμος | 1 | See how you translated **law** in the [2:16](../02/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 731 | 5:14 | qt9c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν | 1 | The words **you**, **your**, and **yourself** are singular here because, even though Moses said this to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was supposed to obey this command. So in your translation, use the singular forms of **you**, **your**, and **yourself** in this verse, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) | |
| 732 | 5:14 | zdv4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | ἀγαπήσεις | 1 | **You will love** is a statement that Moses uses to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You must love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) | |
| 733 | 5:15 | yk60 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰ δὲ ἀλλήλους δάκνετε καὶ κατεσθίετε | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the Galatian believers fighting each other as if they were wild animals that attack each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “if you are mistreating and hurting one another” or “if you are acting like wild animals that bite and devour one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 734 | 5:15 | l2m9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μὴ ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων ἀναλωθῆτε | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the Galatian believers fighting each other as if they were wild animals that eat each other. Here **consumed** could mean: (1) the believers themselves would be destroyed. Alternate translation: “you might not be destroyed by one another” (2) the fellowship of Galatian believers would be destroyed. Alternate translation: “your group of believers might not be destroyed by one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 735 | 5:15 | itx6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων ἀναλωθῆτε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not consume one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 736 | 5:16 | yb58 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | Πνεύματι περιπατεῖτε | 1 | Here Paul uses **walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 737 | 5:16 | tk8i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Πνεύματι | 1 | The phrase **by the Spirit** implies being directed or controlled by the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the direction of the Holy Spirit” or “according to how the Holy Spirit leads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 738 | 5:16 | ut3t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐ μὴ | 1 | The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) | |
| 739 | 5:16 | dyj7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς οὐ μὴ τελέσητε | 1 | The phrase **you would certainly not fulfill desires** refers to not doing what someone sinfully wants to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would certainly not do what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 740 | 5:16 | iron | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desires**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what the flesh desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 741 | 5:16 | rl5s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who has **desires**. He is referring to what a person wants to do as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how this phrase is translated in [Romans 13:14](../../rom/13/14.md). Alternate translation: “what you want to do because of your sinful nature” or “the things you want to do because you are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]). | |
| 742 | 5:16 | w8a1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σαρκὸς | 1 | Here Paul uses **flesh** to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated this **flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 743 | 5:17 | mbdm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul commanded his readers to “walk by the Spirit” in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “I say this to you because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 744 | 5:17 | m7td | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡ&σὰρξ&τῆς σαρκός | 1 | See how you translated this **flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md) and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 745 | 5:17 | xjj9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ&σὰρξ ἐπιθυμεῖ κατὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | The phrase **desires against** implies desiring to do what is **against the Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the flesh desires to do things that are against the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 746 | 5:17 | w7kv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ&σὰρξ ἐπιθυμεῖ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who **desires**. He is referring to what a person **desires** to do as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what you want to do because of your sinful nature” or “the things you want to do because you are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]). | |
| 747 | 5:17 | oyog | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τὸ&Πνεῦμα κατὰ τῆς σαρκός | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If if would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the Spirit desires against the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 748 | 5:17 | xp0l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 2 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the **desires** of **the flesh** and **the Spirit** are against each other. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “This is for the reason that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 749 | 5:17 | r3dk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ταῦτα | 1 | The pronoun **these** refers to **the flesh** and **the Spirit**. If if would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the flesh and the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 750 | 5:17 | ukce | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἵνα | 1 | Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 751 | 5:17 | l0lu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἃ&θέλητε ταῦτα | 1 | This clause refers to the good **things** that Christians want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those good things that you would desire to do as Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 752 | 5:18 | cyud | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | Πνεύματι ἄγεσθε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit leads you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 753 | 5:18 | san8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | οὐκ ἐστὲ ὑπὸ νόμον | 1 | Paul speaks of **the law** as if it were a ruler whose authority people had to live **under**. He means that Christians are not controlled by the requirements of **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how **under the law** is translated in [Romans 6:14](../../rom/06/14.md). Alternative translation: “the law does not control you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 754 | 5:18 | esbf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμον | 1 | See how you translated **the law** in [2:16](../02/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 755 | 5:19 | alfa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός & πορνεία, ἀκαθαρσία, ἀσέλγεια | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **works**, **sexual immorality**, **impurity**, and **licentiousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what the flesh does … being sexually immoral, being impure, being licentious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 756 | 5:19 | yf2a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person who has **works**. He is referring to what a person does as a result of having a sinful human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what people do because of their sinful natures” or “the things people do because they are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 757 | 5:19 | pu5b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῆς σαρκός | 1 | See how you translated **flesh** in [verses 13](../05/13.md) and [16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 758 | 5:20 | rgjl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰδωλολατρία, φαρμακεία, ἔχθραι, ἔρις, ζῆλοι, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, διχοστασίαι, αἱρέσεις | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **idolatry**, **sorcery**, **hostilities**, **strife**, **jealousy**, **anger**, **rivalry**, **divisions**, and **factions**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “worshiping idols, practicing witchcraft, being hostile, striving with others, being jealous, angrily bursting out, causing people to divide, making factious groups” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 759 | 5:21 | fdce | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | φθόνοι, μέθαι, κῶμοι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **envy**, **drunkenness**, and **drunken celebrations**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being envious, being drunk, being drunk while celebrating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 760 | 5:21 | rs9b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** as if it were property that a child could **inherit** from a parent when that parent dies. Paul uses the word **inherit** here to refer to being able to dwell in **the kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will not dwell in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 761 | 5:22 | ejgc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁ&καρπὸς τοῦ Πνεύματός | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the fruit** that **the Spirit** gives to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fruit that the Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 762 | 5:22 | hez3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ&καρπὸς | 1 | Here, **fruit** refers to a result or outcome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the product” or “the result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 763 | 5:22 | fsxn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀγάπη, χαρά, εἰρήνη, μακροθυμία, χρηστότης, ἀγαθωσύνη, πίστις | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love**, **joy**, **peace**, **patience**, **kindness**, **goodness**, and **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “acting lovingly, joyfully, peacefully, patiently, kindly, in a good manner, faithfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 764 | 5:22 | famj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰρήνη | 1 | Here, **peace** could mean: (1) a peaceful feeling. Alternate translation: “feeling peaceful” (2) a peaceful relationship with other people. Alternate translation: “peace with others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 765 | 5:23 | wl7x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πραΰτης, ἐνκράτεια | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **gentleness**, and **self-control**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “acting gently, and controlling oneself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 766 | 5:24 | l6ux | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τὴν σάρκα ἐσταύρωσαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the flesh** as if it were a person that believers **have crucified**. He means that Christians refuse to live according to their sinful natures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “refuse to live according to their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) | |
| 767 | 5:24 | e347 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὴν σάρκα | 1 | See how you translated the same use of **the flesh** in [verse 13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 768 | 5:24 | r86y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῖς παθήμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις | 1 | These phrases specifically refer to the **passions** and **desires** of **the flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “its passion and desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 769 | 5:24 | cgu0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τοῖς παθήμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **passions**, and **desires**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what it is passionate about and what it desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 770 | 5:25 | h9hd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 771 | 5:25 | xvcl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ζῶμεν Πνεύματι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit causes us to be alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 772 | 5:25 | ldm7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζῶμεν | 1 | Here, **live** refers to a Christian’s spirit being alive, which will result in that person living forever with God in heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we live spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 773 | 5:25 | sq7b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | Πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν | 1 | See how you translated **walk by the Spirit** in [verse 16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 774 | 6:intro | bv8h | 0 | # Galatians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some additional issues that concerned him about the Galatian believers.\n\n### Brothers\n\nPaul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers” in [verses 1](../06/01.md) and [18[(../06/18.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### New Creation\n\nSomeone who becomes Christian is a new creation that is united with Christ ([6:15](../06/15.md); [2 Corinthians 5:17](../../2co/05/17.md)). Christians have been given new way of living that will result in eternal life. This is more significant than a person’s ancestry or attempts to obey the laws God gave the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\nPaul uses the word “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses “flesh” to refer to sinful human nature. He contrasts “flesh” with the Spirit in [verse 8](../06/08.md). However, he also uses “flesh” to refer to a person’s physical body or outward appearance in [verses 12–13](../06/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) | |||
| 775 | 6:1 | ss7l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the same use of **Brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 776 | 6:1 | vm8f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ἄνθρωπος | 1 | Here, **a man** does not refer to a particular man, but to any believer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anyone among you” or “one of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) | |
| 777 | 6:1 | vts8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | προλημφθῇ ἄνθρωπος ἔν τινι παραπτώματι | 1 | This could refer to: (1) a believer discovering that another believer is committing a sin. Alternate translation: “a man is discovered while committing any trespass” (2) a person who is overcome by temptation and sins. Alternate translation: “a man is overwhelmed by temptation and commits any trespass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 778 | 6:1 | xmbm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἔν τινι παραπτώματι | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespass**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “trespassing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 779 | 6:1 | t4rm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οἱ πνευματικοὶ | 1 | Here, **the spiritual** refers to spiritually immature believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the spiritually mature ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 780 | 6:1 | tr5r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πνεύματι πραΰτητος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **gentleness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 781 | 6:1 | zudd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πνεύματι | 1 | Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. It does not refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 782 | 6:1 | jrve | σκοπῶν | 1 | Alternate translation: “paying careful attention to” or “looking out for” | ||
| 783 | 6:1 | rrg9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σεαυτόν | 1 | Paul uses the singular pronoun **yourself** here to refer to all his Christian readers. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **yourself** in your translation. Alternate translation: “yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) | |
| 784 | 6:1 | ljx6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ καὶ σὺ πειρασθῇς | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “lest that person’s sin tempts you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 785 | 6:2 | l0mz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀλλήλων τὰ βάρη βαστάζετε | 1 | Paul speaks of the spiritual struggles of immature believers as if they were **burdens** that a person could **carry**. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help one another overcome spiritual weakness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 786 | 6:2 | jfh0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀλλήλων τὰ βάρη | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **burdens**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what burdens one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 787 | 6:2 | i7bf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἀναπληρώσετε | 1 | Here, **fulfill** refers to obeying completely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will completely obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 788 | 6:2 | m6jz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν νόμον τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, **the law of Christ** most likely refers to Christ’s command to love one another in [John 13:34](../../jhn/13/34.md), which Paul also refers to in [verse 14](../05/14.md). It does not refer to a set of rules or the laws that God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Christ commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 789 | 6:3 | v6ts | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 790 | 6:3 | eure | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | δοκεῖ & φρεναπατᾷ ἑαυτόν | 1 | Although the words **himself** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 791 | 6:3 | m4wk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | εἶναί τι | 1 | Here, **to be something** refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be better than others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 792 | 6:3 | zz1g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | μηδὲν ὤν | 1 | Here, **being nothing** refers to someone not being better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not being better than others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 793 | 6:4 | wo1z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person | τὸ&ἔργον ἑαυτοῦ δοκιμαζέτω ἕκαστος, καὶ τότε εἰς ἑαυτὸν μόνον τὸ καύχημα ἕξει, καὶ οὐκ εἰς τὸν ἕτερον | 1 | In this verse Paul is addressing his readers in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person instead. Alternate translation: “let each one of you examine your own work, and then you will have reason to boast in yourself and not in someone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) | |
| 794 | 6:4 | kubv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τὸ&ἑαυτὸν&ἕξει | 1 | Although the words **his**, **he**, and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 795 | 6:4 | umjq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ&ἔργον ἑαυτοῦ&τὸ καύχημα ἕξει | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **work** and **reason**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things he does himself … he can reasonably boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 796 | 6:4 | pb3m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς ἑαυτὸν&εἰς τὸν ἕτερον | 1 | Paul uses **himself** and **someone else** as if they were something that a person could **boast** inside of. He means that people **boast** about themselves or others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “about himself … about someone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 797 | 6:5 | euhw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 798 | 6:5 | ee8v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον βαστάσει | 1 | The phrase **carry his own burden** could mean: (1) people have their own responsibilities and tasks. Alternate translation: “each person must do the work that God has given him” or “each person is responsible for his own work” (2) people are responsible for their own weaknesses and sins. Alternate translation: “each person is responsible for their own sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 799 | 6:5 | hwxg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **burden**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what burdens him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 800 | 6:6 | ggkk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person | κοινωνείτω & ὁ κατηχούμενος τὸν λόγον, τῷ κατηχοῦντι, ἐν πᾶσιν ἀγαθοῖς | 1 | In this verse Paul is addressing his readers in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person instead. Alternate translation: “let you who are being taught the word share in all good things with the one who is teaching you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) | |
| 801 | 6:6 | irxx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὁ κατηχούμενος | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom someone is teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 802 | 6:6 | c1rs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὸν λόγον | 1 | Here, **the word** refers to what God had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 803 | 6:6 | n26e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | ἐν πᾶσιν ἀγαθοῖς | 1 | Here, **all good things** is a polite way of referring to material possessions, including money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to these things or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in all that one possesses” or “in all possessions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) | |
| 804 | 6:7 | o9sk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ πλανᾶσθε, Θεὸς οὐ μυκτηρίζεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not deceive yourselves. No one can mock God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 805 | 6:7 | tm7g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, **for** indicates that what follows is a reason why **God is not mocked**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 806 | 6:7 | gii9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἄνθρωπος, τοῦτο καὶ θερίσει | 1 | Although **man** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person … that the person will also reap” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 807 | 6:7 | x5pi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὃ&ἐὰν σπείρῃ ἄνθρωπος, τοῦτο καὶ θερίσει | 1 | Here, **sow** refers to doing things that will have consequences, and **reap** represents experiencing those consequences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “just as a farmer gathers in the fruit of the seeds he plants, so everyone experiences the results of whatever they do” or “everyone receives the results of whatever they have done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 808 | 6:8 | ejbf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | σπείρων εἰς τὴν σάρκα ἑαυτοῦ&σπείρων εἰς τὸ Πνεῦμα | 1 | Paul continues the metaphor from the previous verse of a farmer **sowing** seeds and harvesting crops. The word **sowing** refers to doing deeds that will have consequences. Here, **sowing to his own flesh** refers to a person doing sinful actions in order to satisfy his sinful nature, and **sowing to the Spirit** refers to a person doing good actions in order to please the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “doings things to satisfy his sinful nature … doing things to please the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) | |
| 809 | 6:8 | p9gl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σάρκα&σαρκὸς | 1 | See how you translated the same use of **flesh** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 810 | 6:8 | lzz8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | θερίσει&θερίσει | 1 | In this verse **reap** represents experiencing the consequences of doing something. See how you translated the same use of **reap** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 811 | 6:8 | dge9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | φθοράν | 1 | Here, **destruction** refers to experiencing punishment forever in hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 812 | 6:8 | cc72 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θερίσει φθοράν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 813 | 6:9 | xgi4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | μὴ ἐνκακῶμεν&θερίσομεν | 1 | When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so **we** would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 814 | 6:9 | xruj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ&καλὸν | 1 | See how you translated **good** in [4:18](../04/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 815 | 6:9 | u77c | καιρῷ&ἰδίῳ | 1 | Alternate translation: “at the proper time” | ||
| 816 | 6:9 | u8fx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι | 1 | Paul is using a statement to give a condition. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a condition. Alternate translation: “if not becoming weary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) | |
| 817 | 6:9 | hw39 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | θερίσομεν | 1 | See how you translated **reap** in [verse 7](../06/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 818 | 6:10 | ax66 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | **So then** indicates that what follows in this verse is the concluding result of what Paul has said in [verses 1–9](../06/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because all these things are true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 819 | 6:10 | gih4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἔχομεν&ἐργαζώμεθα | 1 | When Paul says **we** he is speaking of himself and the Galatian believers so we would be inclusive here. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 820 | 6:10 | yjpq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ ἀγαθὸν | 1 | See how you translated **good** in [4:18](../04/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 821 | 6:10 | e8qt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | πάντας | 1 | Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to indicate **all** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 822 | 6:10 | jz9i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοὺς οἰκείους τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Here Paul refers to Christians as if they were a **household of the faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who are Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 823 | 6:10 | qz9c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Here, **the faith** refers to believing in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that has faith in Jesus” or “that believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 824 | 6:11 | i7ap | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative | ἴδετε | 1 | **See** here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please observe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) | |
| 825 | 6:11 | d6rk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί | 1 | This could mean: (1) Paul had someone write most of this letter as Paul told him what to write, but Paul himself wrote this last part of the letter. Alternate translation: “with my own hand in the last part of this letter” (2) Paul wrote the whole letter himself. Alternate translation: “with my own hand in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 826 | 6:12 | kmd7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εὐπροσωπῆσαι | 1 | Paul’s readers would have understood that he was referring to making **a good impression** on legalistic Jews who did not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make a good impression on the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 827 | 6:12 | r5p1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν σαρκί | 1 | Here, **the flesh** refers to someone’s outward physical appearance, specifically the appearance of someone who has been circumcised in order to impress the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with regard to physical appearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 828 | 6:12 | hnse | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 829 | 6:12 | n8mc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ διώκωνται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that the Jews might do the action. Alternate translation: “the Jews might not persecute them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 830 | 6:12 | jd4x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, **the cross** refers to believing in Christ’s sacrificial death on **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for believing in what Christ Jesus did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 831 | 6:13 | xod7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 832 | 6:13 | cgi6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οἱ περιτετμημένοι&ὑμᾶς περιτέμνεσθαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones who have had a person circumcise them … a person to circumcise you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 833 | 6:13 | xtsq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) | |
| 834 | 6:13 | q2uh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ σαρκὶ | 1 | See how you translated the same use of **flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 835 | 6:14 | yek3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ἐμοὶ&μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | The phrase **may it never be** is an exclamation that communicates a strong desire against doing something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this meaning. Alternate translation: “may I absolutely never” or “may I certainly never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) | |
| 836 | 6:14 | p2zz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions | ἐμοὶ&μὴ γένοιτο καυχᾶσθαι, εἰ μὴ | 1 | If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “may it ever only be to me to boast” or “may I only ever boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) | |
| 837 | 6:14 | ul40 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν τῷ σταυρῷ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the cross** as if it were a location someone could **boast** **in**. He means that he boasts with reference to **the cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when referring to the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 838 | 6:14 | evgd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῷ σταυρῷ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, **the cross** refers to Christ’s sacrificial death on **the cross**. Paul uses **the cross** here in a slightly different way than he did in [verse 12](../06/12.md). See how you translated the same use of **the cross** in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “what our Lord Jesus Christ did when he died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 839 | 6:14 | vsa8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐμοὶ κόσμος ἐσταύρωται, κἀγὼ κόσμῳ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified the world to me, and me to the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 840 | 6:14 | miwn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | κόσμος&κόσμῳ | 1 | Here, **the world** could refer to: (1) the entire world system, which is naturally hostile to God. This **world** operates according to the “elementary principles” ([4:3](../04/03.md)) that exist during this “present evil age” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). Alternate translation: “this world system that opposes God … to this world system that opposes God” (2) the system of values that people share who do not honor God, which is how John uses **the world** in [1 John 2:15](../../1jn/02/15.md). Alternate translation: “what people value in the world … to what people value in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 841 | 6:14 | lpr2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐμοὶ κόσμος ἐσταύρωται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of **the world** no longer influencing him as if **the world** were a dead man who had been **crucified**. Just as a dead person cannot directly influence anyone, so the world could not influence Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the world does not influence me” or “it is as if the world is dead to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 842 | 6:14 | v2qs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | κἀγὼ κόσμῳ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I have been crucified to the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 843 | 6:14 | zhnc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κἀγὼ κόσμῳ | 1 | This could mean: (1) the same as the previous clause, but stated in reverse order for emphasis. Alternate translation: “and I am not influenced by the world” (2) the opposite of the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I do not influence the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 844 | 6:15 | pfcn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul only boasts “in the cross of our Lord Jesus Christ,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I may boast in the cross because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 845 | 6:15 | ck7p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | οὔτε γὰρ περιτομή τὶ ἐστιν, οὔτε ἀκροβυστία | 1 | Here, **anything** refers to being important to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither circumcision is important to God, nor uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 846 | 6:15 | rd5c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ καινὴ κτίσις | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but a new creation is something important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 847 | 6:15 | n6n7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καινὴ κτίσις | 1 | Here, **a new creation** refers to the whole process when someone trusts in Jesus and the Holy Spirit gives that person a new life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how **new creation** is translated in [2 Corinthians 5:17](../../2co/05/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit giving someone a new life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 848 | 6:16 | wrnk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | στοιχήσουσιν | 1 | See how you translated the similar use of **walk** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 849 | 6:16 | evn3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ κανόνι τούτῳ | 1 | Here, **this standard** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse, specifically the importance of someone being a “new creation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as new creations” or “as those whom the Holy Spirit has given new lives”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 850 | 6:16 | n987 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing | εἰρήνη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, καὶ ἔλεος, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul adds a blessing here. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may they and the Israel of God experience peace and mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) | |
| 851 | 6:16 | auo7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰρήνη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, καὶ ἔλεος, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **peace** and **mercy**, you could express the ideas in a different way. See how you translated **peace** in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “may God make them feel peaceful and be merciful to them and to the Israel of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 852 | 6:16 | b4al | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | This could refer to: (1) Jews who believe in Jesus, in which case **and** functions as it usually does to connect two things. Alternate translation: “and upon the Jewish believers of God” (2) everyone who believes in Jesus, in which case **and** indicates that **them** refers to the same group of people as **the Israel of God**. Alternate translation: “that is, upon God’s people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 853 | 6:17 | cidu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τοῦ λοιποῦ, κόπους μοι μηδεὶς παρεχέτω; ἐγὼ γὰρ τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματί μου βαστάζω | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because I carry in my body the marks of Jesus, from now on let no one cause me trouble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 854 | 6:17 | cz8a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κόπους μοι | 1 | Here, **trouble** refers to the distress that some of the Galatian Christians caused for Paul because of the problems that he wrote about in this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “trouble me with regard to these issues” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 855 | 6:17 | ww8m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κόπους μοι μηδεὶς παρεχέτω | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trouble**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “let no one trouble me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 856 | 6:17 | ahlc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐγὼ & τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματί μου βαστάζω | 1 | Here Paul speaks about **the marks** on his **body** as if they were objects that he carried around. He means that **the marks** remained on his **body** everywhere he went. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the marks of Jesus are always on my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 857 | 6:17 | j729 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ στίγματα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, **the marks of Jesus** refers to the scars on Paul’s body that were made by people beating him because he taught about **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the scars I received because I taught the truth about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 858 | 6:18 | ch05 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing | ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν | 1 | As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Galatian believers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May your spirit experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ” or “I pray that your spirit will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) | |
| 859 | 6:18 | m7mj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ χάρις | 1 | See how you translated **grace** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 860 | 6:18 | r9zk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν | 1 | Jesus is speaking of the spirits of his readers in general, not of one particular **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “your spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) | |
| 861 | 6:18 | wywe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν | 1 | Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “you” (2) the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Alternative translation: “your inner being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 862 | 6:18 | pk25 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated the same use of **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) |